Adler Hebrew001st

STUDENT'S

H E B R E W GRAMMAR,

W I T H

EXERCISES AND VOCABULARIES.

BY

MICHAEL ADLER, B.A., Minister of the Central Synagogue; formerly Senior Hebrew

Master at the Jeios* Free School, London ; Author of

"First Steps in Hebrew Grammar."

SECOND EDITION.

L O N D O N :

DAVID N U T T , 57 & 59, LONG ACRE.

1908,

LONDON :

PRINTED BY WERTHEIMER, LEA AND CO.,

CLIFTON HOUSE, WORSHIP STREET.

PREFACE TO THE FIRST EDITION.

THE present work is intended for students who aim at acquiring an accurate knowledge of the essentials of Hebrew Grammar. It does not profess to be a complete Grammar, but rather to serve as an introductory manual to the use of the Standard Hebrew Grammar, the Kautsch-Gesenius.®

The plan of the book is based upon the experience of many years as a teacher of elementary and advanced students, and follows upon the lines of my "Elements of Hebrew Grammar," + that has obtained so gratifying a sale. Subjects that present serious difficulties to the beginner, such as the laws of the changes of vowels, have been simplified, and all non-essential details, such as the exact formation of Noun forms from Verb roots, altogether omitted. The Syntax has been interwoven throughout with the Accidence, and. the graduated Exercises are designed to illustrate the laws of Syntax and teach the forms of the inflections. In the earlier Exercises, all the phrases are not Biblical, but, from Exercise 15 the sentences are taken, almost without exception, from the Bible, and thus form a useful introduction to the language of the Scriptures. The study of the text of the Bible should commence as soon as the subjects treated of in my " Elements of Hebrew Grammar " have been mastered.

For a student who has not previously learned the elements of the

language, it would be advisable, in using this book, to pass from Chapter IV.

to Chapter IX., and to learn the intervening chapters later. The Verb

forms would thus be learnt immediately after the Unchangeable Noun.

The Tables of the Changeable Nouns are based upon those in Kautsch-

Gesenius, pages 274 sq. The method of learning the Verb as described on

* English Edition by Collins and Cowley. Oxford : Clarendon Press, 1898. f This manual was afterwards rewritten and published under the name of

" First Steps in Hebrew Grammar," 1904.

iv PREFACE.

pp. 79, 80, is the outcome of practical experiments that have demonstrated to me that the numerous forms of the Verb are thereby better retained in the memory.

In compiling the Vocabularies to the Exercises, I received most valuable assistance from my dear wife, and I further desire to express my sincere gratitude to my honoured teacher, Dr. Friedlander, of Jews' College, who read through my MS. and favoured me with some of the results of his life-long acquaintance with the Sacred Tongue. If this book be of some help in promoting a systematic study of the language of the Bible, and enable students to enjoy to the full the rich treasures of Holy Writ, I shall regard myself as amply rewarded for my labours in preparing it.

M. A.

PREFACE TO THE SECOND EDITION.

BEYOND the correction of a few misprints and some additions to the

Vocabularies, this edition is a reprint of the first. Students who require

to have the earlier portions of the Grammar explained in fuller detail

should consult my " First Steps in Hebrew Grammar."

M. A. 38, HALLAM STREET,

PORTLAND PLACE, W.

1908.

All rights reserved.

CONTENTS.

CHAPTER I. PAGE

1

3

4

o

o

7 9 9 12 13 14

CHAPTER II.

§ 1 7 The Article ... 16

§§ 18-21 Pronouns ... , 18

§ 2 1 A Agreement of Verb and Noun, The Verb TO BE 21

§§ 22-23 Particles. Section 1 22

§§ 24-25 Pronouns joined to Prepositions ... ... ... 22

§ 26 Relative Pronoun with Prepositions and Adverbs 24

§§ 1-3 § 4 § 5 § 6

§§ 7-9

§ io §§ H-12 § 13 § 14

§ 15 § 16

The Alphabet Classification of the Letters... The Vowels Syllables

The Shevo The Dogesh, nBT and P'?D

31?», 'li"? The Accents... 'IP and 3V13

Changes in Vowels, and Pausal forms Radical and Servile Letters...

VI CONTENTS.

C H A P T E R I I I .

NOUNS AND ADJECTIVES.

§§ 27-28 Gender. Number

§ 29 The Dual

§ 30 Plurals of Nouns with simple changeable Vowel

§ 31 The Particle 1

§§ 32-34 Adjectives

§ 35 Objective Case after Transitive Verb

\ 36 Absolute and Construct States

PAGE

26

27 28 29 29 31 33

C H A P T E R IV .

NOUNS (continued).

§§ 37-41 Inflection of Masculine and Feminine Nouns. Un

changeable and with simple changeable Yowels 33

§ 42 Nouns with Irregular Plurals ... ... ... 37

§ 43 Adjectives with In/iected Nouns ... ... % ... 38

§ 44 Rule of Personal Pronoun being added in a

sentence. Feminine of Verb forms ... ... 38

§ 45 Formation of Nouns... ... ... ... ... 40

§ 46 Cases of Nouns *40

C H A P T E R V.

NOUNS (continued).

§§ 4 7 - 5 0 B Inflection of changeable Nouns, Masculine ... 41

§ 50c How to parse a Noun ... ... ... ... 49

C H A P T E R VI.

§§ 51-52 Inflection of changeable Nouns, Feminine... ... 49

§ 53 Further peculiarities of Feminine Nouns ... ... 52

§ 54 Dual Nouns ... ... 53

§ 55 Irregular Nouns ... ... ... ... ... 54

CONTENTS. Vl l

C H A P T E R V I I .

PARTICLES. Section n . PAGE

§§ 56-62 Inseparable, Separable, and Inflected Particles ... 56

C H A P T E R V I I I . NUMERALS.

§§ 63-68 Cardinal and Ordinal Numbers, and their rules ... 64

C H A P T E R I X . THE VERB.

§§ 69-71 The Root and the Conjugations §§ 72-76 Moods and Tenses

§ 77 Regular and Irregular Verbs

§§ 78-81 Prefixes and Suffixes of the Verb .

§ 82 Hints upon learning the Verb

§ 83-87 Table of the Regular Verb ...

§ 88 Notes on the Verb forms

^ C H A P T E R X.

THE VERB {continued).

§ 89 How to parse a Verb ... ... ... ... 88

§§ 89A, 8 9 B Syntax of the Verb 89-91

§ 9 0 1 Conversive ... ... . . . 92

§ 91 Jussive and Cohortative forms of the Future ... 96

§ 92 Notes on the Imperative, Infinitive, and Participle 99

§ 9 3 The Present Tense ... ... ... 103

§ 94 Notes on the Conjugations. Sentences with the

expression of an oath. Transposition of letters

in the Hithpael ... ... . . . . . . . . . 103

§ 95 Rarer Conjugations . . . 106

V l l l CONTENTS.

C H A P T E R X I . PAGE

§§ 96-104 The Verb with Accusative Suffixes of the Pronoun 106

C H A P T E R X H .

§§ 105-113 Guttural Verbs 112

C H A P T E R X I I I .

§§ 114-115 Classes of Irregular Verbs ... ... ... 123

§§ 116-117 Irregular Verbs J"S 124

§§ 118-119 „ „ V'V 128

C H A P T E R XIV.

§ 120 Irregular Verbs K"D 132

§.§ 121-122 „ „ *"B 135

§§ 123-124 „ „ )"y 139

§§ 125-126 „ „ K"h 144

§§ 127-128 „ „ nHX? 147

C H A P T E R XV.

§§ 129-132 Doubly Irregular Verbs 152

C H A P T E R X V I .

§§ 133-136 Doubly Irregular Verbs {continued) 158

C H A P T E R X V I I .

§§ 137-139 Hebrew Poetry 164

§ 140 Comparative Table of Regular and Irregular

Verbs 167

Vocabulary I.—Hebrew-English 170

„ ' II.—English-Hebrew 185

STUDENT'S HEBREW GRAMMAR.

CHAPTEK I.

The Alphabet,

1. Hebrew is a branch of the family of Semitic languages,

that also includes Arabic, Phoenician, Syriac and Chaldee. I t

derives its name from the Hebrews, who were the most

prominent of the descendants of *!!}$? Eber (Genesis xi. 16)

that retained their ancestor's name.* The writings, from which

the Grammar of Hebrew is derived, consist of that collection

of books called the Tp'fi or Bible, f

2 . The Alphabet consists of twenty-two letters, all of which

are Consonants. The Vowels are supplied by certain points

and dashes placed under, above, or in the middle of the

Consonants.

* Another derivation of "Hebrew" is from the phrase iri3rt "QJJD {see Joshua xxiv. 2), the people who came " from the bank of (or, from beyond) the river Euphrates."

f There exist only two ancient inscriptions in a Hebrew dialect, viz.: the Moabite Stone, of the time of King- Mesa of Moab (9th Century B.C.), and the Inscription of Siloam, attributed to the days of King Hezekiah (8th Century B.C.)

The word *]'yr\ is made up of the words PHIF) Law, the Pentateuch, DW33 Prophets, and Dîna Hagiographa.

B

2 STUDENT'S HEBREW GRAMMAR.

THE LETTERS.

2

1

n 1 T

n D

Finals.

D a I i

D

y 5] fi

p n

n

RASHI* SCRIPT.

3

7

t

P

D

Finals.

1 ^ i

D P

1 * P

q P

D

p

NAMES.f

Ahlef. *UfL Beth (Bice, Yice). Gimel. Dalet. hJbtAL

Hei. He

Yav. V ^ Zayin. «2>a ~

Cheth (Ches) as in loch.

Teth (Tes).

Yod.

Kaf, Chaf.

Lamed.

Mem. Noon. Mc^y

Samech. Ayin. ^**~

Pei, Fei. ^ -

Tzaddi. Koof. / ^ C

Sheen, Seen (.S^'d).

Tav (Tav, Sav) 7 °w*-

NUMERICAL VALUE. J

1

2 3 4

5

6 7

8

9 10

20

30

40

50 60 70 80

90 100

200

300

400

* This form of the Alphabet is largely used in Rabbinical works, and derives its name from its being employed especially in the printed editions of Rashi, ^pPIV! nb^>$ *5H CEO), the famous commentator of the Bible and the Talmud, who lived in the 12th Century.

•f The thicker portion of the name denotes the sound of the letter. Thus : 3 is 1>,.3 is g (as in the English word go'), 1 is d, etc. N and V> have no sound, but follow that of their vowels. The sound ng for JJ is declared to be wrong by modern grammarians.

X These numerical values are not used in the Biblical text. /The intermediate numbers are formed by combining the units and tens : 36=1/ , 192=3¥p.

CLASSIFICATION OF THE LETTERS. 3

3. There are two systems of reading Hebrew—the one adopted by the Spanish and Portuguese Jews (DH^SD), and •>• by most non-Jewish scholars ; the other, that of the German and Polish Jews (D*U3#K>

According to the first system, 3 and 3 (i.e., with the dot called $yi Dogesh * [Dagesh]), are always b; H and F\ are always t) but 3 is p, and 3 is / ; 3 is k, and 3 is eh.

According to the German system, when the six letters fl'S'S'Y^'?1 have a Dogesh, they are hardened. Thus : D, 3 , 3 , 3 are b, k,p,t; but J"), S, D, 3 are 0, cA, / , £.

The five letters X'S'i'fi'3 , t when placed at the end of a word have a distinct final form.

$ and b* are distinguished by the position of the dot, which is called the " diacritical point."

There are no capital letters.

There is no hyphen, therefore every word must be written in full on the same line.

4 . Class i f ica t ion of t h e L e t t e r s .

The letters are arranged in five classes, according to the organs by which they are uttered, viz.:—

1. Gutturals, (pronounced with the throat) - JMI'LTX

2. Palatials, ( „ „ „ palate) - p'5'*'J

3. Linguals, ( „ „ „ tongue) - rViVEn

4. Dentals, ( „ „ „ teeth) - f l '^ 'D 'T

5. Labials, ( „ „ „ lips) - - T^'ST^F "*

* See § 10, p. 7. The names as read_ia the_ G-ermansystem are ujed in this bookL Thus Dogesn7 Shevo, etc., for Dage3h, ~Sheva, etc.

f These letters are punctuated and formed into a word to serve as a mnemonic. This is frequently done in Hebrew Grammar (see § 4). In modern times, no distinction is made in sound between!) and 2, 1 or 1, in either system, although a distinction is-still maintained in some Oriental countries.

B 2


In Class 4, both $ and & are included. The letter 1 is also frequently classed with the Gutturals. The Dentals are also called Sibilants (or hissing-letters). The letters ^'Vn'N, when after a vowel, and without any

distinct sound, are called Quiescent letters. Example:—

5. The Vowe l s . * There are five Long and five Short Vowels—

LONG VOWELS.

| Portuguese reading.

a as in father 1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

^na pyr\ V

ay

e

o

oo

supreme

BO

voot

German reading.

o as in note.

i „ ah 've(or^)

e „ supreme.

ow „ now.

oo „ root.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

- nns - SiJD

SHORT VOWELS.

- |faj5 pVn (short J

- Jbj5 f Oj5 (or re|? i n-icn) short r»i? I

T W

Po?

a

e

r

(5

w

'tuguese reading.

as in

j >

?>

»

5>

father

men

fit-

not

fwll

German reading.

a as in father.

a „ fate or fat.

i „ at.

o „ not.

OJ ..„ ...fwll.

* There is another system of classifying the Vowels, that is based upon the three primary vowel sounds A, E (which includes I), and U (which includes 0).

There are thus three classes of vowels:— First Class : A Sound—1. pDj3 ; 2 . njTIB ; 3 . VlJD (as in the word npS). Second Class: E and / Sounds—1. 9f t t prn \ 2. jfcg PTO; 3. H * ;

(as in the word i3). Third Class : U and 0 Sounds—1. DTir :

; 2 . Y&\> ; 3 . DS'IPI ; 4. ;bn P£j3.

THE VOWELS. 5

Notes on the Vowels.—(a) Observe that the name of each vowel has that vowel itself in the first syllable. Thus : V£p, 1"W9 (except

VPi?.—(b) V9B is boih Long and Short. I t is Short:—1. When it is a closed accentless1 syllable.2 Thus : ^H^tP has the accent on the second syllable, and the Y ?l? under the & is short; but in f"H5>tt7 where the accent is on the E7, the Y^P is long. In the word D ^ , the accent is on the second syllable, therefore both V?l7 are long. 2. When before a Guttural with —, as T E ^ . In nearly all other cases, the YPP is long.

nnQ.—-(c) The n n § coming under the H or n at the end of a word is pronounced before the final letter. Thus : D-TH is read roo-ach, and not roo-cha; 7?3| is read go-vow-ah, and not go-vow-ha. This HOB is called the rp^J l nriQ, the furtive or sfo/ett nnQ.

Defective and i w/Z writing.—(J) The 1 of the and the ** of the V n | p ^ O are occasionally omitted. The word is then said to be defective p P t f ) ; when the Dîn and the V h | P T O are written in full, the word is said to be full (KvE). Examples: Defective writing, ^"Wn, ^?bfen . Full writing, V ^ W , *jyVten. When the V ^ p is employed in place of the P*JW, the word is also said to be defective. T h u s : Dp*? is defective, Etifi&full.

6 . Syllables a r e : — ! . Open or simple, when they end in a

vowel or one of the let ters VVP!'». T h u s : tflKX^, a 1 1 t h e

syllables are open. 2. Closed or compound, when they end in

a consonant. T h u s : ft5¥5> both syllables are closed.

7 . NMP.—In addit ion to the t en vowels, there is a sign

wr i t t en — under a letter, called a fcO£> (Shevo, Sheva).

1 See §13. *8ee§.6.

G STUDENT'S HEBREW GRAMMAR.

There are two kinds of JfltP, viz. :—

1. Pl3 &0£ , the nlent or quiescent or resting JOB*.

2. yj Nlfe?> the sounding or moveable JOB*.

1. !"|J fcOfc^-—The 7m£ fcOfeJ* is not written under the last T T : T :

letter of a word, except (a) when the last letter is a "f, as

*?|Vl3, ^ | / ; (b) or, when the word ends in two vowelless con

sonants, as PlBÎ, FwfaD', i n this case both have the silent fctf$.

The silent H)$ has no sound whatever, and serves simply

as an indication that the letter has no vowel sign, and that

the syllable is a closed one.

8. 2. The sounding or moveable H)$ — This has the sound of

short e in the phrase the books, said quickly, and is thus

used :—

(a) At the beginning of a word, as 7bp> *J?1; (except

under the letters JJ'n'n'K).

(b) When in the middle of a word, two consecutive letters

have bi)$, the first is silent H)$, and the second a T : T :

sounding tfj#; as ^l-D^Sl beshiv-te-cho (beshib-te-cha).

(c) Under the first of two equal letters; as TÎT.

(d) Under a letter after a JHfi ( s^ § 11, 2). (e) Under a letter with a strong Dogesh (see§ 10, note S).

THE VOWELS. 7

9. Compound tf\& or H a l f - V o w e l s .

There are three half-vowels, compounded of a H)$ and a

short vowel, viz.:—

i. - nne tpn; as in -\m; nton. 2. - f & D t)ton ; as in ^ H , n £ y \

3. —7\X3 tjtjn; as in nbX, pCNH.

These are found chiefly under the Gutturals JJ'H'PTN, as in

the above examples, where other letters would take a H)p.

The word fttOH means short, and denotes that the vowel

has to be read very quickly.

10, The D o g e s h Wll.

The Dogesh is a dot that can be placed in the centre of a letter.

There are two kinds of Dogesh :—

A. The Weak Dogesh (Dogesh Lene) Sj5 &F\.

B. The Strong Dogesh (Dogesh Forte) DJPI S W -

A. The Weak Dogesh:—This only appears in the letters

rVS'S'l/J'S , and has the effect of hardening the letters (see

§ 3, p. 3 and note).

The Weak Dogesh is placed in one of these letters :—(1) When it commences a word, as J3, 7H3, T H , {PI3, fTlS, iTTlft.

Except when preceded by a word which is closely connected with it in sense, and ends in an open syllable. Examples : f"U7!J7 Vlh and not ^Pi ; njp irpi and not ^$3. (see also end of § 13).


(2) I n the middle of a word, after a silent XIJP. Examples :—

T3TK (and not ISTX); itfP (and n o t / i h ^ ) .

B. The Strong Dogesh occurs in all let ters except TjMl'PTX,

and indicates t h a t the let ter is to be doubled in the pronun

ciation. This doubl ing of the le t ter (1) modifies the meaning

of the word ; or (2) indicates t h a t the let ter wi th the Dogesh

s tands for two letters, for itself and for a let ter t h a t has been

dropped.

Examples of (1), to be found in the conjugations of the

Verb and in the Nouns. Of (2), SiDpH instead of htS^Xl. The

3 is assimilated to the p , and the doubling of the p is expressed

by a Dogesh.

Notes on the Dogesh,—(1) The dot that appears in a H at the end of a word, is called p^59 (i.e., bringer out of the sound), and causes the H to be distinctly heard. I t is chiefly used with the 3rd feminine singular of the pronominal suffixes, in the sense of her. Example:— PTD-ID her horse. I t is also used in other forms, as n*n | high,

and panted.

(2) The Strong Dogesh is occasionally used for the purpose of improving the sound of a letter, and is then called the Euphonic or Emphatic Dogesh* E x a m p l e s : - n r f f f l B (Gen. xii. 18), ^ Sfettp (Exod. xii. 31).

(3) When a letter has a Strong Dogesh^ and a N}tp below it, this NJtp must be a sounding NW.

(4) The Dogesh is omitted in a ? (with a W ) , Examples: "lrfjn înstead 'of ^"«*0), ^ H (instead of" T^-)-

* Also called connective or conjunctive Dogesh.

THE VOWELS. 9

(5) For the changes of vowel caused by the letters "V^TTn'H not admitting a Doge&h (see § 15, p. 13).

nip"} (i.e..feeble, soft)—Ts a horizontal ]ine placed over a letter to denote the absence of a Dogesh or a P11? , where either might be expected. It is now rarely used. See Exod. ii. 3, WS^n,* rhpHJ-li.

11. JHO Metheg (—).—The JHfi (i.e. bridle) is a small vertical

line placed under a letter, and serves as a check upon the

reading by preventing hasty combination of consonants.

Thus: nSfiJjS is to be read with long yop and sounding *0£>,

ko-te-lo, (ka-te-la); without the jriib the word would be kot-lo,

(kot-la), with short p£j3 and silent xv^.

(1) It is always placed before a Compound fcop (§ 9, p. 7).

Thus: hhxb, ribv$. (2) The K}£> under the letter after a Jfi£ is a sounding KU?.

(3) Its place is usually on the third syllable, before the

accented syllable. Thus: ^SDiO, riB>\

12. Zptif Makkef, is a short line placed between two words,

the first of which is unaccented (see § 13). The two words

so joined are treated as one word. Examples:—"flXPrrW},

Ji-

IS. The Accents.—Most words have the Accent or stress upon

the last syllable. In this case, the accent is called j n S o (i.e.,

* The Dogesh in the V is an Euphonic Dogesh. -j- i.e. Bringing near one to the other.


from below). When the accent is upon the last syllable but

one, it is said that the accent is (i.e. from above).

Examples:—Of Milra: S*n j? \ DnSD ; of Milel: PintoSfi ,

T??? - By fche sign — , the place of the accent is here indicated.

"* In the Bible there are certain signs, above and below the

words, that show the manner of chanting the text. These

signs are called Tonic Accents (ni3*JJ), and are usually placed

upon the syllable that is to be accented.

There are two systems of Tonic Accents, the first used for

all the books of the Bible, except Psalms, Proverbs and Job;

the second, used for these three books only.f

Each system consists of two main classes :—

A. Disjunctive or Distinctive Accents.

B. Conjunctive Accents.

A. Disjunctive Accents separate the words one from the

other, in various degrees ; some are used like our full-stop,

colon and semi-colon; others like the comma, or even lesser

degree of separation.

* The remainder of this paragraph, and likewise §§14 and 15 should be omitted by beginners.

f These books are usually called the il 'E'N *H ? p • The word iTE'N is made

up of the three initials : N=ni^«7bJ, B ^ b t t f e Proverbs, n=U*7TlF\ Psalms.

THE VOWELS. 11

Of the first system,* the following are the principal Disjunctives:—

(a) pV?D (~) always placed under the accented syllable

of the last word in a verse, followed by the sign

p lDS WD (•)> {i.e. end of the verse), like ovx full-stop.

Example :—Gen. i. 1, : ' pXH .

(b) XflmnX ( - ) divides the verse into two parts like

our colon. Example: Gen. i. 1, DVT?i$.

B. Conjunctive Accents join the words closely together in meaning.

The principal Conjunctives are :—

(a) nyiO (7) . Example :—Gen. i. 2, J3$, P in ] .

(b) ^&T\ti (7) . Example :—Gen. i. 9, HIlPlO .

(c) »T)p ( - ) . Example—Gen. i. 1, HN, f\tl).

Influence of the accents upon the Weak Dogesh.

In § 10 the Rule is given, that when a word ends in an open syllable, and the following word begins with one of the

* Disjunctive Accents.—\, p ^ p - . 2. n:ns or xnmnx-. 3. *W or artao ±, 4. rhy)® i . 5. Vn| ?]PT A . 6. ibj? ^ t A. 7. an?in 7 . 8. J W 1 - . 9. Ni?1!!±. 10. KB^B A. 11. 3 ^ 7 . 12. ^35»7. 13. en* A 14. D?KnH-. 15. T t ? - . 16. n-iB\JTB^. 17. KB>ty? njna A. 18. WVllh m-10 I7 . The stroke after the a is called p^p?.

Conjunctive Accents.— 1. rU-IB 7 . 2. ^?n£ 7 . 3 . «?"]» 7 . 4. «?")£

n ^ B ? 7 . 5. K i l l 7 . 6. K^?« or KDng JL . 7. n|Bj? fc^fl A . 8. H I J 7 .


letters JYS'D'f J'!!, this letter cannot take the Weak Dogesh

(see p. 7).

When, however, the first word has a Disjunctive Accent,

the second word does take the Weak Dogesh in its first letter.

Example:—Gen. i. 27, DHK *na HJjM* IDT.

According to Kule in § 10, since H lMI ends in an open

syllable, the next wrord should be N ^ (without the Dogesh);

but, as POM5! has the Disjunctive Accent Knsp, bt*\3, retains

its Dogesh.

Other examples:— aMfi xS but, aj jn * 6 ; niTfi DTll

but, Dân mm.

14. K eri and K e s iv (K e t ib) n p and yf\2.

On the margins of the Bible, a different reading is some

times given to that which is in the text. The new reading,

which is to be substituted for that in the text, is called ^j5

(which means, that which is read); the word in the text is

called the ^T)2 (that which is written).

Examples:—Gen. viii. 17, the 1 ^ 3 is NXIPl (with a 1); on

the margin, the ^ p is given as XX^n (with a *).

Leviticus xxv. 30, the ^H-D is X7 not, but the **1p is 17 to

him, giving quite a different meaning.

In reading the Bible, the H p is adopted.

THE VOWELS. 13

15. Changes in Vowels.

The many changes that take place in Hebrew vowels form

a rather complicated subject, but only the most important

points are given here :

1. Owing to the fact that the letters "Vj PTfYN do not take

a Dogesh, the following changes of vowel occur under the

letter preceding the Guttural:—

— becomes —. Example:

» .. • » ~ or ) „ _ o r V „

" .. * j>

—H$* •• T •

TW *l£5?N

becomes flNKl.

•• T "

- T&-» ipvx.

2. When words are lengthened, the first vowel is frequently

altered. Thus: when the long vowel y^PT *s under the first

letter, it becomes a sounding KVf; or, if the first letter is a

Guttural, a Compound &oi$\ Examples:—*\yi becomes D'H PT

(not bnyp; hnz, nSnf; pan, mapir.

3. If two &W come together at the beginning of a word,

the first one is changed to a jbi? Pjn, Thus: the preposition 7

has ordinarily the vowel kjte> ; but, if it is prefixed to a word

commencing with a N)£>, it becomes h. Thus: nfcbvh to Solomon, and not H

4. When forms occur at the end of a verse or clause, such

14 STUDENT'S HEBREW GRAMMAR,

as is marked by a p-^p or NnrOTK, ^ e P e n u l t imate vowel is lengthened. Thus:—

&p& becomes WW TTp lD becomes ^Dffi

V?t?D becomes J|7tpp

These are called Pausal forms (i.e., forms at a pause).

5. The following vowel changes, under various circumstances, should also be noted :

— becomes —. Example :— T hand, T_ the hand of.

— „ —. „ DX mother, *ftit my mother.

he icill slay, T?23p* he will slay , : ' , : , T , : " thee.

16. R a d i c a l a n d S e r v i l e L e t t e r s .

The letters of a word that form part of the Root or Stem are called Radicals. Nearly every Root consists of three letters.

The letters that are added to express number or gender or verbal form, or otherwise qualify a word, are called Serviles. The Serviles modify the meaning of the word and form the inflection. When Serviles are added, the word is said to be inflected.

The following are the onty letters that may used as

Serviles: aVp"! T\'W"Q }'ftvK, whilst every letter of the

alphabet can form part of the Root.

Example:— The Root or Stem is Sfcp. The letters n.'3'ft'n"l are Serviles.

EXERCISE. 15

EXERCISE 1. (On Chapter I.)

1. Give the Hebrew letters for 19, 27, 31, 65, 151, 526,

6110* 7496.

2. Give the numbers of the following :—2"D , N"bp, T"ton,

rrbt&n, r n n , Y'Sttn ; also the values of the words Nnrr ^ m ,

bwiar* SEE?, D^nnt&nsni, np^ Tbns •ofc n£.-f

3. Name the class to which each of the following letters

belongs:—cnn bnpW D^wn ntf -pn^ in bstt VIN b^rr ^sb^n \nsrr mpn mb "DTI prrs^ annns VISM nan ^tc\

4. In the following words, state in each case whether the

V?H is long or short: - z>nn, robo, nrnnn, ^rin, riEji, nn^p*

5. Write the following words full :—*\ZTW\)9 nbbtp, Drnptt,

6. In the following words, separate the open from the closed

syllables:—itt^p1? nzwTi nvmn$ -TOT; wbi sittfqsri rib") tobpn tfb irp?S3 ^ nnpeJip.

7. In the verses quoted in question 6, explain why the

letters HM'TrD have, or have not, the Weak Dogesh.

* The thousands are usually written thus : 1,000 .'K; 2,000 ' 1 ; 3,000 'J, etc.

t Add together only the letters marked °.


CHAPTER II.

17. The Article.

1. There is no form for the Indefinite Article a.

The Definite Article the is expressed by H (with the vowel

nns) prefixed to a word, followed by a Strong Dogesh in the

first letter of the word. This is used for all genders and

numbers: D D horse, or a horse, D lDH the horse, D^DPJ the

horses.

2. The Dogesh is omitted in the letter * when it has a Kit?,

(see § 10, B, Note 3). Example :—*11K* river, "Vlfc n the river.

3. When the Definite Article precedes one of the letters

lyrYSl'N (that cannot take a Dogesh), the vowel under the

n becomes H or H. Examples:—^VUn, T^XH, Qpttn.

17a. The exact rules are as follows :—

(a) With N and "V—In front of N and % the rule given in Chap. I., § 15, 1 (p. 13), applies, and H becomes H. Examples:—

•(b) With H and V without accent.—In front of H and V (with the vowel V9l?) that have not the accent upon them, in words of more than one syllable, the H becomes 77 (with ^ 9 ) . Examples:—

THE ARTICLE. 17

(c) With H.—In front of H (with any vowel except V£|?)> the H retains its T1HQ. Examples:—Tinn, vOTH.

(d) With ^ .—In front of ^ (with any vowel except V£i?)> a n ( l ? in monosyllabic words, the n has V£i?' Examples: — 1 3 5 7 > a?7, ~ ^ 7 .

(e) With n.—Before 7 (with long V9i?), and H (with V^l? *)£0), the H becomes 7 . Examples :—1^77 > D^tpinn.

In all other eases, 7 remains ; as, ttTjnrTj QV?7n.

Exceptions : QH7 those, (not, according to (c), EHH); "1-ipn ^ e 6/eW man, (not, according to (d), ^ 3 y n ) .

The nouns TT mountain, "15 bull, EV people, Yl$ land, 2H feast, become ^ 7 7 , "»5n, D^n , n « n , 2 7 7 .

4. When one of the Prepositions 3 in, with, by; 7 to, for;

3 0$, <ft&£, is prefixed to the Definite Article, the following

changes t ake place :—

The n is omitted, and the preposition t akes the vowel t ha t was

under the if. Example :—MDP! the horse, to the horse,

contracted into MD^.

The1? has received the vowel of the M in place of i ts own.

The Dogesh in the D remains.

Other examples :—0^3 = 0 ^ 7 3 ; p K ^ p K H 1 ? . T h e

contracted forms are a lways to be used.

5. Nouns in the Construct S ta t e never t a k e the Definite

Article (see § 36, 3, p. 33).

c

1 8 STUDENT'S HEBREW GRAMMAR.

VOCABULARY 1.

A.

2« (m.) father. -n« (m.) light.

• 27^ (m.) man. VI*? (f.) 0ar£7&, land.

15 (m.) son. 1DCT (m.) lovingkindness. ">?D (m.) &M&.

18.

->p? (m.) dtwtf. ^5 (m.) bull.

V } (f.) /oo£ 1 cmd.

? as, like. *? to,/on

EXERCISE 2. Translate :—

1. The father. 2. The son. 8. The book. 4. And the light. 5. Like the earth. 6. As the lovingkindness. 7. And the foot. 8. In the land. 9. To the man. the ox. 11. In the dust. 12. Like the father.

10. To

B. Add the Detinite Article to the following words, and translate* :—

i. afe>#. 2. nis. 3. Tft n. 4. ofrto. 5. :n.n. 6. n#. 7. bn\ 8. "p£\ 9. "Ttorj. 10. Tin. ii. brr«. 12. rn.

The Pronouns .

.4.—Personal Pronouns.

SINGULAR.

J, com. ^ J X , *JK, 0 «

Thou% m&s. flPlX, npftt

Z%ow, fern. PlX

PLURAL.

IF*, com. MPiJ , UPU> ^

Fbw, mas. DRX

Fo^, fern. jftX or flJFlK

2%0#, mas. DP! or HSPI

jfte/, fern. jn or Pl-H

: For these words, sue Vocabulary I., p. 170.

THE PRONOUNS. 19

Notes:—(1) The Objective (Accusative) Case, me, thee, him, her, us, you, them, is expressed either by the word iHN (or fliH) with pronominal suffixes {see § 57, p. 57), or by the suffixes alone (see § 97, p. 107).

(2) The Possessive Pronouns, my, thy, his, her, our, your, their, are expressed by suffixes attached to the Nouns {see § 38, p. 34).

(3) *Oft and HP1M are pausal forms {see § 15, 4, p. 14).

(4) The Personal Pronoun is added to the verb for emphasis. "1DH M H he said is more emphatic than ">£N.

(5) The Personal Pronoun is sometimes joined to a pronominal suffix to emphasize the suffix. Examples:—**?S"D3 >?5^:? bless me, even me also; nriM"D5 ^ T " n ^ thy blood, even thine.

19. B.—Demonstrative Pronouns.

Sing.

Plura l

HT this, mas.

HKT this, fern.

n ? X these, com.

Kînil that, mas.

fc^PH that, fern.

DPl/l those, mas.

j n n those, fem.

Notes:—(1) ^ this, com. is found in poetry only.

(2) When joined to a Noun, the Demonstrative Pronoun is placed after the Noun, agreeing with it in gender and number, and both words take the Definite Article, Examples:—This book, mas. sing. n$r\ ^B71; that woman, fem. sing. W*inn nt#tfn ; these words,

mas. plu. n^sn nnyrn; those laivs, fem. plu. )rifi rrhino. (3) When in addition, an Adjective is joined to the Noun, the

Demonstrative Pronoun is placed last, all tliree words taking the Definite Article. Example:—This good book n j n n i&n ")$Sn.

(4) When the Noun is predicate, the Demonstrative Pronoun is placed first in agreement with the Noun. Examples :—This is* the man, EPtfn HJ; these are* the ivords, U^D^n H^M.

* The Verb to be is frequently omitted. c 2


(5) The Demonstrative Pronoun that is formed by adding the Definite Article to the Personal Pronouns of the 3rd Person.

(6) nrft frequently means this thing. Example :—n^'ilK) ivhat is this thing ?

(7) Rarer forms of the Demonstrative Pronouns are :—This ^ 0 , njy>n, STC O; these %TT.

SO. C.—Relative Pronouns.

"l^K who, ichich, that, (used for all genders and numbers); sometimes contracted into fe? or £J>, (with Dogesh in next letter) and prefixed to a word. Examples :—nftKfcJ* which thou;

ichich is to me, which is mine.

For use of Relative Pronouns with Prepositions, see § 26, page 24.

For n used as a Relative Pronoun, see § 92. C, 4, p. 101.

2 1 . D.—Interrogative Pronouns,

*ti who ? (used for persons). I H& what? (used for things).

HO is also sometimes "HO (followed by a *|j?.c), or f!&. *u? means to whom ? whose ?

VOCABULARY 2.

nt£7S (f.) woman, wife. ^y\ (m.) word.

0*n: T (pl.) words. OV (m.) day.

C D (m.) horse. D ^ D (pl.) horses. n-jim (f.) /aw.

nvrin (pi.) laws. uy$W heaven.

^t?D (m.) ram. C>"i?p (pl. m.) books. nfcri»5 (Vb. 3rd pers. mas.

sing.) and (As) said.

Dn^?W Abraham. P^V. Isaac. -3pS> Jacob.

THE PRONOUNS. 2 1

21a. Rules of the syntax of a Verb.—1. A Verb agrees with its subject in gender and number; and the Verb usually stands first. Examples:—T\Wti *1&K*1 and Moses said; D H ^ N IfiN*! and Abraham said.

2. If the subject is not expressed by a separate word, it is contained in the form of the Verb and the Pronoun of the Person, Gender and Number denoted by the Verb is used. Thus: "lfifc^l, being 3rd person mas. sing., is translated "and he said," tbtffll , being 3rd person fern. sing.,,, means "and she said."

8. The Verb to be, in all its parts, is very frequently omitted, and should be added in translation. Thus: DPH1X ^X I am Abraham; D^DPl npit these are the horses.

EXERCISE 3. A. Translate:—

n^B ^ 4. nny ro nbw 3. JCIN ^ 2. TI^TI HE 1. ^P25 ""^"i 8. a^Hn nn« 7. sînn ni>:n e. n-rn ci*n 5. ->?5>n 11. vi.M2 Di-isn D>8^2 ?>* 10. Di»n nj 9. on >p n-rn nsn ^ b 13. nbsn o n ^ s 12. nri-tn rn inm n-m

v - T - • : v •• T • T : - •*•**• - T - : v -

*">»tf*:! 16. Yl*?a IB?W wnn nwn 15. nri-tn nttfsn ^p 14. .Tyb n^w-nn is. is©? nri-T-ne 17. njrbn ^ « n >p c r r n s

B. Translate :—

1. Who art thou ? 2. This is the woman. 3. Who is that woman ? 4. These laws. 5. And he said, That man is Isaac. 6. Like this word. 7. What are these books ? 8. This is the book. 9. Who is she ? 10. These words are in the law. 11. Whose book is this ? 12. And Moses said, Who am I ? 13. In those books. .14. I am Jacob, and that man is Abraham. 15. And the man said, The horses are in the rain.


22 . Part ic les . SECTION I

The term Particle includes all Prepositions, Adverbs, Conjunct ions, and Interjections.

An Inseparable Par t ic le is one t h a t is a lways a t tached to a word, and forms pa r t of the word itself.

There are four Preposit ions t h a t are inseparable, viz . :— # S , 3 , 7 and ft.

23. 3, 3, h a re pointed wi th a few.

Exceptions:—(1) When the preposition precedes a letter with a &V0, the rale in § 15, 3, p. 13 applies. Examples:—HID$2 (not iTtetp^) in names, ntotp? (not ntotj??) like names.

(2) When the preposition precedes a Guttural with a compound WJ^, the corresponding short vowel is used. The corresponding

short vowel to nnz n&q (-:> is ring c - ) ; to VPi? *)©rj ( o is vpt? jbjj ( r ) ; to VfcH? ^ 0 (••••) is bi^D (v). Hence, ^ t f £ (not ^W^3)in which; SttPblS*? (not ^ V ^ ^ ) to Elisha; ^ n b (not *?qS) to sickness.

(3) The preposition in front of the Definite Article, causes a contraction {see § 17, 4, p. 17).

(4) The vowel V9f? 1S a^ s 0 frequently used. Thus : HJ2 in this, to safety; and especially before accented syllables, as ^$"1?

to inherit, nrtfrj fo ^ ^ e ; so also before infinitive forms of one syllable, as rap1? to arise* nw?b to go out.

(5) Note the following peculiarities: nb«b to say, like God, n-f imb toJudah.

2 4 . Pronouns are added to the preposit ion in the form of suffixes {see § 38, p. 34).

3.—^3 ^ we> Suffixes. T | 3 0 m ^ / ? ^ ,

IT3 in thee,

*|3 w Aim.

Pi 3 w Asr.

com.

mas.

fern.

^33 in us, com.

D33 w /ow, mas.

| 33 *w 2/ow, fem.

D3 or DP13 «w tfAam, mas.

{PI3 in them, fern.

* Pausal forms of *|3 and ?|7 are ^3 and IjT5

PARTICLES. 2 3

with Suffixes.

7.—v to me, ith {

ixe6- Tp0 to thee,

*TJ7 to thee,

*)7 to him.

TD to her.

com. I XD to usy com.

mas. I D37 to you, mas.

fern. I ' p 7 to you, fern.

to them, mas.

JPH to them, fern.

3.—3 is lengthened to 103, in most of its forms, before suffices, adding the pronominal suffixes :—

*}03 like me.

TJ03 like thee, mas.

*H03 'Ae thee, fern.

^DOS #Atf A//??.

H03 #Ae /2£r. T T

^ 0 3 #A# MS.

D33 ^ 0 2/0 w> mas.

J33 #£0 2/ow, fern.

DH03 or DH3 #Z# them, mas.

JH3 or n3!l3 like them, fern.

Observe the idiom: T|03 *0O3 i" «-^ like thee (= l ike me, like thee).

25 . "JO (always followed by a f]i?»), or 0 (always followed by a Dogesh, to compensate for the omission of the J), from, out of. Thus: From Moses, nfc?0"JO or n&?00.

Before a Guttural ($00 § 15,1, p. 13) 0 becomes 0 . Example:—

JJ^NO from a man.

0 .—^00 /row w£.

tOO (;|00pausal) from thee,m.

"HOO /row thee, fern.

*l300 /rom /MM.

(1300 from her.

with Suffixes,

^1300 from us.

D30 from you, mas.

J30 from you, fern.

DPlO /rom êw, mas.

JPlO from them, fern.

* Pausal forms of T|3 and *|p are ^2 and "5|?.


"}J& (tt) with the Definite Article, ISDHO from the book.

The H does not take a Dogesh, therefore the vowel under the

0 is nv ($£#§ 15,1, p. 13). More frequently, the fuller form "ftp

is used before fl. Thus : ^SEpPn|ft.

Section II. of the Particles, see § 56, p. 56.

2 6 . Use of the Relative Pronouns with Prepositions and Adverbs.

An ordinary sentence is turned into a relative one by merely

prefixing the Relative Pronoun *1^N, without altering the

sentence. Thus: 121 in him; i2l I ^ X in ivhom, (which is the

same as ^ X 2 l ) ; )h IWit to whom; )2lpZ ^ J N "l^X in whose

midst I am.

So also with Adverbs: D£> TH David is there, IVl D£J> "lEW

where David is; T\12!$ thither, T\HX^ *1^K whither.

VOCABULARY 3.

n?3 (m.) house. Tf E (m.) King.

7if?K (f.) Queen. TH David.

n"Jtt? Sarah. Dtp #^re.

D? aZso. D5...DI both...and.

n&tf thither. v3 aW (for all gend. & num.)

7fl?l and ât>£ (3rd mas. sing.) njW a ? ^ fo#& (3rd mas. sing.)

Observe the order of the words in the following sentences:

HH V P?*5 and David gave to me; ^7fif! I1? Hjp*1 tfwd ^ e 7aw#

ft>0& /or himself

EXERCISE. 2 5

EXERCISE 4.

Translate :—

nwft cnb 1^*5 3. en DS s n 25 2. winn y^sn-]? l.

p n«n nb -i£ri*5 6. rr-jn n ^ n bs Tjb 5. ^VeflH np 4.

Tjb^ *[bs 9. ^ - n o 8. nbsn D*psiDn b 7. ^s

nt^« ib rri?*i 11. ia nsbftn -law n>n man 'pb 10.

M-in 14. b -i^-b^l ^s *yb 13. cpbi ^b-np Tjb n ins»i 12.

05? D3 ^ D2 16. -ininp rriss i n n ~i£N*i 15. ny? nb

.\n.Nnb?:? fbp ^ 18. ib ntrs-b?p ^ssn nb ]n*i 17.

Translate:—

1. These books are for me and for you. 2. We are

like you. 3. That man is in the house which is thine

( = to thee). 4. From Moses unto Moses, who was like

Moses ? 5. Like thee, like David. 6. And David took

the horses for himself (=for him). 7. Thou art like a

king. 8. All this land will be thine ( = u n t o thee). 9. And

the king gave unto us. 10. And the man took from

them (m.). 11. I am like a father to him. 12. And he

took from me a sword. 13. These are all the books

that are for you. 14. Mine is all the earth. 15. And

Moses said unto us, This is the law. 16. And Isaac took

a wife for himself.


CHAPTER III.

Nouns and Adjectives.

27. Nouns.* Gender.—There are two Genders, Masculine and Feminine.

Nouns t h a t are of both Genders are said to be of the Common

Gender.

There is no Neuter Gender.

I n English, the Gender of a Noun is decided according to

the meaning of the word.

I n Hebrew, the Gender is usually decided according to the

form of the word.

A Feminine Noun usual ly ends in T\— (wi th poj? in front of

the n ) or n , as HEAD, H^P l , ftdpfi, Y n i f

The absence of t he H— or fi usual ly denotes a Masculine

Noun, as MD, "D, " D ^ - Nouns ending in H— are Masculine.

The Gender of some nouns is determined by their meaning, as in English :—

(a) Masculine.—Names of nations, rivers, mountains, metals and months are usually Masculine. Examples :—12S1E [the people of) Moab; bfcnC^ Israel; H i ? Euphrates; V^7 Lebanon; 2/7T gold; "TJM. Adar; ^ 5 $ Abib (the ancient name of the month Nissan).

(b) Feminine.—Names of countries, towns and members of the body are usually Feminine. Examples:—CH5 Persia; D^tET^ Jerusalem; "P hand; /2T).foot.

Chief exceptions: Masculine are, tt?M"l head; ^B mouth; nb and heart; t)& nose.

* The formation of Nouns is treated of in § 45.

NOUNS. 27

28 . Number.—There are three Numbers:—

(1) Singular. (2) Plural. (3) Dual.

(3) The Dual expresses things that exist by nature or art

in pairs, as hands, eyes, tongs. Also in a few other expressions,

as two years, hvo days.

Masculine Nouns form their plurals by adding D**- (with

the vowel h)!* PTD). Examples:—D*|D horse, D*D*lD horses;

*li2l3 warrior, DH153 warriors.

Feminine Nouns form their plurals by substituting Hi for

H—. Examples:—PlCflD mare, JTlMD mares; PHIft laiv, JTnift

laws.

2 9 . The Dual is formed by the termination D^T for both

Genders. Examples:—DV day, mas. sing, U*)2V two days, dual;

T hand, fern, sing, D^T hands, dual.

If the Noun ends in T\, the letter is first changed into H,

and then D — is added. Examples:—p|}# year, D*r\3E> two

years; H S ^ Up, OTlSS? Ups.

Note.—1. E?£ water and BÊtt? heaven are not Dual forms.

2. There are no Dual forms in Pronouns, Adjectives or Verbs.


EXERCISE 5.

A. Give the Genders of the following Nouns, and the reasons for the same. (For the meanings of the words, see Vocabulary p. 170.)

l. reriN. 2. DH?9. 3. 7Tp_. 4. B§?S. 5. ttfin. 6. Trpti. 7. n^n. 8. 1*K 9. bsn?. 10. Vrs. n . 71s. 12. m ^ ? .

B. Turn into the Plural, with translation:—

1. n|>D. 2. r m . 3.TH. 4. nbîn?. 5. VS. 6. n3>?p. 7. "V??. 8. ttft^tt.

C. Turn into the Dual, with translation :—

1. V^n. 2. njjbp. 3. HEN. 4. n£>in.

3 0 . Note on the Plural of Nouns :—

1. If the first vowel in a Noun is YQ\>, it is changed into a

K}2> when forming the Plural, or adding any suffixes ( ^

§ 15,2, p. 13). Examples:—TJ3B, pi. DH'pS; JMStt, pi. D W .

2. If the first letter is a Guttural, nriB tjBn takes the place

of the xw Thus: DDH, pi. D*MH. T : • T -r •*- • T - ;

EXERCISE 6.

Turn into the Plural, with translation :•—

i. ^55. 2. -i?j. 3. bate. .4..Q^5. 5. bii|. 6. bbrr. 7. vn$. 8. TO?.

ADJECTIVES. 29

31. T h e P a r t i c l e 1 and, but.

1. In front of a letter with a vowel, the ) is pointed a K}&?

as, D^DJll and the horse.

2. In front of a Guttural with a compound KIB^ the 1 takes the corresponding short vowel (see § 23, 2). Examples:—fifiJO and truth ; Ifttitl) and an ass.

3. In front of a KV , or one of the Labials (ft'fi'VS), it is written ) . Examples:—ytt) and with all; T]u?W*[ and Solomon ; *W?ti) and a king.

4. In joining words that occur in pairs, ) is sometimes used. Examples:—D.*fil DlY? bread and water; DV day and night.

5. For the use of 1 with the Verb, see § 90, p. 92.

32 . A d j e c t i v e s .

1. Adjectives have four forms, Masculine Singular and

Plural, Feminine Singular and Plural.

The terminations for these forms are the same as for Nouns. Examples:—

Mas. Sing. i t o good, I DT high,

Fem. Sing. PQitD PUT)

Mas. Plural D^lft &&}

Fem. Plural HQ1JD | Mto1!

2. Adjectives are placed after the Noun.and agree with it in Gender and Number. Examples:—lift MD # #00^ for**;


PD1t3 PlEfiD a good mare; D^litD D^lD good horses; JliD lD

JYftitD good mares.

The same agreement exists between Adjectives and Pro

nouns, the Adjective being usually first. Example:—FIX rQib

thou (f.) art good.

3. If the Definite Article (PI) is prefixed to the Noun, it is

also placed before the Adjective. Example:—!lit3H D lDH the

good horse.

4. When the Adjective is predicate, it may stand either

before or after the Noun, and does not take the Definite

Article. Thus: iitO D DH or D lDH HitO the horse is good.

5. For rule of Adjective and Demonstrative Pronoun, see

§19,(3) .

6. If the first vowel in the Masculine Singular form of

an Adjective of more than one syllable be a yE|j it is changed

into a tt}^, when the terminations are added, (as in the Noun,

see §30, p. 28). Examples :—SH3 big, great, T&\1Z, D ^ H | ,

rnbni; p?n strong, npjrj,* ffprrj, nipjn.

33 . 1. .All Adjectives may be used as Nouns: ^|£0 a good

man ; H^ltO a good woman; jDT an old man.

2. Adjectives have no Dual forms.

The Adjective in the Plural agrees with the Dual Noun:

ffiiltOjpn DH^H the two small hands.

* See § 30, (2), page .28.

ADJECTIVES: USE OF J")K. 3 1

('>'' 34 . Comparison of Adjectives.—The Comparative Degree of an

c/ Adjective is expressed by the Positive form of the Adjective

7 followed by 0 (with its Dogesh), or "JJ5 W*w. Examples:—

nHD 2to (or niTJJb) faster *Aa» David; B ^ f i pIMO s r t r

y than honey.

f ; The Superlative Degree is expressed (1) by adding the word

* n«ft very, or ntffi 1$} or 1Kb IXti; (2) by prefixing 3 (fol

lowed by Dogesh) to the Noun in the Plural: D*Dttfi ^Hil

tf/^ biggest horse (lit., big among the horses); (3) by adding

73fi than all: D^D/ l ?3£? /H5 bigger than all the horses, (i.e.,

the biggest horse).

The use of Adjectives with inflected Nouns, see § 43, p. 38.

35 . Rule of the Object (Accusative) ofter Transitive Verbs.—The

Noun governed by a Transitive Verb takes the word ~T)ii

(or HX) before it. Thus : Dip&PTJlX tfl*) and he saw the place.

Note.—"HX (or HX) is only used, (1) when the Noun has

the Definite Article; (2) or, has a Pronominal Suffix; (3) or,

is in the Construct state (see § 36); (4) or, before Proper

Nouns.

In the Biblical text, Htf is used when with a Tonic Accent, (see § 13); "H^ when followed by a PJJSIB.

For other usages of "HX or HK, see § 57, p. 57.



n\>^ri n^Dn nrprq 2. nisan-nsi minn-ns ib-jj-i * 1. iew'ai n^rrpn 0*^330 bs-riN n«to np?y* 3. oniann-ip ]Dfcj5 THE ni£ HD 5. M nn cipips D^n D^£p 4. cnb nnito nri-rn rninn 7. D ^ 5 S 9 Q ^ ^$p pjn p 6. b?-ns bnan if^n nbgfti* 8. Ywi? T? - b son rnint^ nbii} nn?5 nan îipn s^?n -IENM 9. Dip^n-p nr>Tp?n TH «n»i* 11. nkw?7 niacjpn ninygrr ninito 10. ^TO«:

-ns ni^n «^jn b 75^ 12. nip Tyb n -»g?« cipsn-ntf ib n«?B"b?"ny ?p-rn Tjbpn -lab 70*1 13. nbsn D^-^bn tthsn «-p 15. *T'HS *T2 ^B )Ut N2 ri^3 *M nbfri DV 14. natop ns-rn nnv^n ]6. nr^sgs ntr^ nn-rn-nî *)tj|rr-n$ -n$ wân set?^* 17. r w ? n#B nhy?rr-b39 rai& 031 Dips D ^ 5 ? Qîtan is. Y«9 Ys© win raits nftî n n ^ n nnits 20. ^b ns nb iorf*i njbfcn-ntf Q?nn tjbEn *n»i 19.

."nbpb n b? *iP?n ^?W ^n-m bsp rninn rrjf?^ B.

1. This wise friend is very faithful unto me. 2. These fishes are big. 3. And David gave* him the new robes which were in the house. 4. The horses are bigger than the asses. 5. What are these songs unto thee ? 6. The commandments are holy unto us. 7. And Isaac said* unto him, What is this great sorrow ? 8. And the wise king gave* silver and gold unto the good woman upon that day. 9. Who is holier than the prophet and who is greater than the prince? 10. The fishes in this place are very small. 11. They are the best officers in this land. 12. Moses is taller than Abraham and stronger than David. 13. A faithful friend is better than gold. 14. And the king sent* the faithful officers from that place and he gave* to them horses and asses. 15. What is better than the holy law which we have ( = which to us).

* For these Verbs, see.Vocabulary, page 173.

THE NOUN. 33

36. The A b s o l u t e and Construct S t a t e s of a N o u n .

1. A Noun is said to be in the Absolute state when not joined to the Possessive case of another Noun ; all the Nouns in previous Examples and Exercises are in the Absolute state; even when joined by a Preposition, both Nouns remain in the Absolute state.

2. When a Noun is joined to another Noun, the first Noun

is said to be in the Construct state; and, in English translation,

the word of connects the Nouns. Thus: T\$l2 D lD the horse

of Moses; 0)0 is joined to PltJfo and is in the Construct s tate;

r\pti is in the Absolute state.

3. A Noun in the Construct state does not take the Defi

nite Article. Thus: TWti D lD the horse of Moses (not D lDPl).

4. Observe the following order of words: pTHH ^ / ^ ^ ^ (not T723P1 pTHIl MD) the strong horse of the king, (because the Adjective must follow the Noun, and |7SPt D lD is considered as one Noun).

5. The Construct state takes the place of the Genitive case in other languages.

CHAPTER IV.

THE NOUN—(continued).

37. The Inflect ion or Dec lens ion of N o u n s .

Nouns are inflected or declined by adding Pronominal Suffixes of the Possessive case {my, thy, his, etc.), The endings are called the Inflections.

T)


For the application to Hebrew Nouns of the six Cases, as in

Latin (Nominative, Vocative, Accusative, etc.), see § 46, p. 40.

All Nouns take the same Inflections, and may be roughly

grouped into two Divisions :—

Division I.—The few Nouns called Unchangeable Nouns,

that do not change the vowels of the Absolute state

during inflection. Such are : D^D, IV, HD lD, fTWH.

Division II.—The majority of Nouns, called Changeable

Nouns, that change one or more of the vowels of the

Absolute state during inflection, as T?fi, •ate my

king (not ^ t ? 0 ) ; W , "Spy? thy word (not * f m >

38. Scheme of Pronomina l Suffixes.

A.— With Nouns in the Singular.

PLUKAL. SINGULAR.

1st com. *—

2nd mas. TT—

2nd fern. T—

3rd mas. ) or)?] his.

3rd fern. fl—orfl her.

my.

thy.

1st com.

2nd mas.

2nd fern.

3rd mas.

3rd fern.

« T

&?7) \*7\ D—*

I T 8

our.

your.

their.

Note.—With Nouns in the Feminine, ending in Pi, this letter

is first changed into a fl before the Suffixes are added. Thus:

^rniF) my law, from PHIF), (not ^PHID). See further below, § 41.

* Rarely DH, }n; Poetic ending ID.

THE NOUN. 3 5

1st

2nd

2nd

3rd

Srd

B.— With Nouns in the Plural SINGULAR.

com.

mas.

fem.

mas.

fem.

*— my.

Sh V—° his.

T

rp— her.

PLURAL.

1st com.

2nd mas.

2nd fem.

Srd mas.

3rd fem.

W~ our.

' your.

D ' T ~ f ) f ^ w

Observe the presence of the * in all Suffixes to Plural Nouns.

39. Declension of a Masculine Noun (Unchangeable). PLURAL. SINGULAR

Absolute. DID horse.

construct. DID the horse of.

*0)Q my horse.

TJD^D thy (mas.) horse.

' *nD lD £% ( f ^ m 0 horse.

ID lD /ws horse.

^ W D owr /zors£.

D5P^lD your (mas . ) horse.

PPÎD your (fem.) horse.

DD© £/J£&V (mas.) horse.

jD lD ^0&V (fem.) horse.

D^D lD horses.

^D lD ^ horses of.

^ D /ray horses.

"TDÎD thy (mas.) horses.

"Tf P lD thy (fem.) horses.

VD^lD ^ ' s horses

rrp^lD her horses.

W^D lD our horses,

DDTflD yowr ( m a s . ) horses.

\ytND your (fem.) horses.

DPPMD their (mas.) horses.

jiTp^D their (fem.) horses.

P a u s a l f o r m s : TjD lD b e c o m e s Îp^lD; ^ D b e c o m e s ^ D ;

"TJ^pijD b e c o m e s ^ D * l D .

* Poetic form -1i"P- f Poetic form ID*—.

D 2


Notes.—(1) With Masculine Nouns, the E of the Plural ending is dropped before the inflections are added; thus ^ D my horses, not

(2) The Gender of the Suffix, just as in English, is not affected by the G-ender of the Noun; the contrary is the case in other languages, as French, German, and Latin.

(3) The vowel ny, as in T ^ D , or YW in ° P ^ , or htiD in T O ^ , that joins the Noun with its Suffix, is called the binding or union vowel.

4 0 . S imple Changeable N o u n s (see § 30, p. 28).

1. * Masculine Nouns, like NV33, *fV?£>> whose first vowel is

a long ppi^ and whose Plurals are: D*X*5J, D^TpS, (with a N}B>

under the first letter), make the same change, when declined.

Thus: Tj?S the officer 0/, Const.; *Tj?fi my officer, VTp$ A&

officers. Every form, except the Absolute form, takes a x}^

under the first letter.

2. If the last letter of these Nouns is a Guttural, before

^J, Db, p , this last letter takes a nnsi t)Bn (see Rule in § 9).

Thus: ^Jtf^ *% prophet, (not T|N*53) ; MN*M yow prophet,

(not M^?}).

EXERCISE 8.

1. Decline in Singular and Plural, with the translation of each form:—

ttfcob, T IED, ^ , "ite?..

2. Decline in Singular and Plural, with the translation of each form:—•

s ^ j , m j , tt?ii,^, TJJ.

* The Nouns of this kind really belong to the Changeable Nouns of Division II., but their variation is so slight that it should be learnt at once.

THE NOUN. 37

41. Declension of a Feminine Noun (Unchangeable). SINGULAR.

Absolute. HMD mare.

construct. HEAD the mare of.

^HDID my mare.

thy (mas.) mare,

thy (fern.) mare.

IJID ID his mare.

nriD lD her mare.

^Jlp^D our mare.

DDfiP^ your (mas.) mare.

jDflP lD your (fern.) mare.

DMD D their (mas.) mare. T T X '

{HWD their (fern.) mare.

PLURAL.

JTlD^D mares.

HID lD the mares of.

TflDID my mares.

TpHiWD thy (mas.) mares.

TniMD thy (fern.) mares.

VJliDffi his mares.

PlTTlMD her mares.

^JTlMD our mares.

D^^niWD your (mas.) mares.

p^D^lD your (fern.) mares.

DITJTlD^D their (mas.) mares.

jrVfliMD their (fern.) mares.

Note.—The Pi of the Absolute Singular form of the Noun becomes fi in inflection. Pausal forms: Wlpffi becomes 'TjnpilD; srmO becomes TliMD.

EXERCISE 9.

1. Decline in Singular and Plural, with the translation of each form:—

nbsn, min, rns, mi\

4 2 . Some Masculine Nouns take the Feminine termination

in the Plural, as, Dlpfi place, r to lpf i ; "11X0 light, HHlKfi;


Similarly, some Feminine Nouns have the Masculine form

in the Plural, as, }3X stone, D^3N; 1 ^ city, D^tf. See also

Irregular Nouns, § 55, p. 54.

43. Rule of Adjectives with Inflected Nouns.

Add the Definite Article to the Adjective. Examples:—

l i ^ n ^ D my good horse; H i l ton VJTniFl his good laws.

44. Rule of Personal Pronoun being added in sentences.

The Personal Pronoun is frequently added in sentences

containing the verb to be, although omitted in English. The

Pronoun agrees in Gender and Number with the Noun to

which it refers. Thus: fcOH y T\)T\ MDPl this horse is mine;

nimfin these laws are good.

The Feminine of Verb-forms.—Verb-forms, that in the Mas

culine Singular have a \ exchange this for a T\ in the

Feminine Singular. Thus: H/fc^l and he sent, TOPP\\ and

she sent; Yp^\ and he gave, JfiPlI and she gave.

EXERCISE 10.

A. Translate:—

b3 5. ^pJTl??1? 4. ^bw 3. ^ i p ^ P 2. TTfcW? 1.

D tpi-rjpn v s ^ 8. n^rribis 7. onn-i^s e. •qbian l y p .îpp-bs n-iQn-n^ n^nsn nbtprii- 10. nnin^n in}s» 9.

* For these Verbs, see Vocabulary I., page 173.

THE NOUN. 3 9

D^PIDLT nia? n;g 2. an a^pr ns-tn \n«n îiM b| i.

bs-ritf a i Q TPSn niDq-bs-ritf rri??i» 3. T y i s n*si

nnrirn* nsb^n rrpttt-n^ nj&ipn nn?2n yi©tt?rii* 4. DJTD-ID

*p^?£ bpi Dîsn bs bs nnw p^s 5. Y«9 IV sin nairo

.a^s>p;j atj? -i$$ ni3Dn n*N 6. ^b ?n rrh,^

C. Translate:—

1. My asses. 2. The asses of my friend. 3. Our burnt-offerings. 4. Thy ( / ) welfare. 5. Her daughters-in-law. 6. In the place of the mighty men. 7. My statutes and his commandments. 8. The maidens of the queen. 9. The righteous princes of the land. 10. You are my witnesses. 11. In his might. 12. His laws and his good statutes.

D. 1. And Abraham saw* all the princes of the king.

2. We are the mighty men of David. 3. And he said* unto my friends, Ye are strangers to me. 4. The prophets of the sanctuary are more holy than all the nobles of the king and all his princes. 5. The righteous men of this land are more holy than its ( / ) prince. 6. The prayers of the elders are for the peace of the king. 7. Who is more holy than the prophets of the sanctuary ? 8. And Moses took* all the burnt-offerings from the place. 9. And he said unto David, Thou art more righteous than I. 10. And the prophet gave* bread and water unto all the mighty men of the king. 11. And the old prophet said* unto him, Also I am a prophet like thee. 12. And my good friend gave* unto the sanctuary these candlesticks of gold.

* For these Verbs, see Vocabulary I., page 173.


4 5 . F o r m a t i o n of N o u n s .

Nearly all Nouns are derived from the Roots of Verbs.

There are two main classes of Nouns:—

A. Primitive Nouns.

B. Derivative Nouns.

A. Primitive Nouns consist of a few Nouns that are

not derived from any other words or known Verb-roots.

Examples:—]3N father; DX mother; D*lD horse.

B. Derivative Nouns comprise the majority of Nouns that

are derived from other Nouns or from Verb-roots. These

Nouns are formed in two ways :—

(1) By taking the Verb-root and altering the vowels,

without adding any letter. These are called Simple

Derivatives. Examples:—From T?ft to reign, ^h'Q

king ; from to eat, food.

(2) By adding to the Verb-root, one or more of the

letters Y^fi'J'&'N'Pl (called the Formative letters).

Examples:—From queen, kingdom,

dominion; from food; from PlTl

to be angry, |*nil anger.

4 6 . Cases of Nouns.—Special forms of the Nouns to indicate

Cases, as in Latin, do not exist. The six Cases may, however,

be represented as follows:—

THE NOUN. 41

Nominative: D lD horse.

Vocative: D lDH 0 horse ! (see § 56, c. p. 57).

Accusative : WDPTfiK the horse.

Genitive: Put the preceding Noun in the Construct state.*

Dative: to a horse (web to the horse).

Ablative : D^Dfi from a horse.

Pronouns are declined similarly :—

Nominative and )

Tr L. \ *tot, nm i, thou. Vocative: J ' ":

Accusative : Tltf, WW* me, thee.

Genitive: >W, h ^ K , t ^S IBWt of me, of thee.

Dative: *7, *Tf7 to me, to thee. ^ i

Ablative: ^fifi, ^\t2& from me, from thee. -ft ' v tUl C H A P T E R V . l ; ? v

DECLENSION OF NOUNS—(continued).

DIVISION II .

4 7 . N o u n s t h a t a l t e r t h e i r v o w e l s w h e n dec l i ned .

The majority of Nouns belong to this Division.

A. Masculine Forms.—All the nouns in A are Masculine in form (i.e., they do not end in T\ or T\—), but several are Feminine in Gender, as p K (f.) stone; QX (L) mother; $$ (i.)ifre.

* In Post-Biblical writings, 7&; of (abbreviated from h T^'tf) is used, as : D-1D the horse of the king. This form never occurs in the Bible, and

the student should not use it.

f The Pronominal Suffixes more usually supply the place of the G-enitive of the Pronouns.


4 8 . These may be divided into four main Classes:—

Class I.—Segolate Nouns. So called because the second

vowel is most frequently a h')l$} as T?£> ^£p. Some

have a nnk or p"vn in the second syllable, as /!?£ work,

or JVT olive, whilst others, as i y j youth, *)yfe? gate,

have nns in both syllables.*

The chief characteristic of the Segolate nouns is

that the Absolute state of the Plural has the vowêls

aw and yojj, as D ^ f t , D^fiD, D n » l

When declined, the Segolates seldom retain the vowels

of the Absolute Singular forms. Nearly all Segolates

are nouns of two syllables.

Class II.—Comprises those nouns of two syllables whose

second vowel is not 713D, but which, in many respects,

resemble the Segolates.

Like the Segolate?, nouns in this Class have the KJtf

and YQPr i n the Absolute state of the Plural.

Their chief characteristic is the presence of a *W

under the first letter of every form under inflection.

* Originally, all Segolate Nouns were of one syllable only, ending in twa

vowelless consonants. Thus: ^pD, IQp, t£Hp, JVT» *1JJ3. To avoid this harsh

ending, a helping vowel was inserted between these last consonants, which

was either a as in *n?'D'i a nnS , as in *1J£D (caused by the Guttural); or

a pT0» when * was the second consonant, as in JVT.

THE NOUN. 43

If the first letter is a Guttural, a Compound NJif is

used in place of NJ'f. E x a m p l e s : * — ^ ^ ^?C» p l u r a l

Class III.—Comprises nouns of two syllables that retain the first vowel unchanged, but change the second vowel. Examples:—DTIJ? eternity; HIP! seer.

Class IV.—Comprises monosyllabic nouns requiring a strong Dogesh under inflection. Examples:—Dtf people; YT] arrow.

49a. Changeable Nouns.—Masculine.

CLASS I.

SING.

Absol.

Const.

my

thy

PLUR.

Absol.

Const.

my

your

A.

king.

ifte *f?9

.â *F? &

oôbp

^bo ^ b ^ f

M^ba

B.

book.

"1?P ^?D

'HPP

11?9

nnap

^.?P

"nspt

D3^.?P

c.

youth.

nP5

^53

^53

T]23

D^?3 ^.53

nyjf D7T1S3

D.

sanctuary.

&*&

tfjP

îr? âJijj

D ttHft

^1i?

Îl7:t D^ttHR

E.

death. n59 rvto

vita

*I/pta

D\nta

>nta \nta

Q^nta

F.

olive.

J T ?

\T ^.T

ffTJ

D\TJ

VT*

^TT.

n;>\rm

* The nouns like TpB, &0D3 (se£ § 40, p. 36), partly belong to this Class,

in taking the &OE> under each first letter.

f The inflected forms from w?/ to o%/' usually take the vowels of the Plural

Absolute : thus, ^"HSD^ etc.; your and their follow the Construct

form, thus, DrVD^D, D i n S D , etc.


49b. CLASS I I .

SING.

Absol.

Const.

my

thy

PLUR.

Absol.

Const.

my

your

A.

word.

^ ^

n y t Tjyi

D^n^

. .3n n y t

Dp^P'1!

B.

wise wzaw.

D?rr Qpq

^ ? q

W 3

D^ppq ^?r\ '•SpO

Dp^pn

c. o/e? man.

m ra?

*gp.T

*T?P?

Q^BT

î?? PT

Qp\3pT

D.

field. n i b n i p

^

'FTP pmb his]

rrnip

*iv *i&

to^TP

49c.

SING.

Absol.

Const.

my

thy

PLUR.

Absol.

Const.

my

your

CLASS I I I .

A.

eternity.

obis obis

*>pbi2 Tjpbis

o^bis

^bSs

- T

Dysjbis

B.

enemy.

^ K

^ ^K

I?1!'**

EW'H "W'H W'M

D^vyrh

c. seer.

njh n?h nn

pnjh Aw]

D>th

\?n ^n

M^n

49d.

SING.

Absol.

Const.

my

thy

PLUR.

Absol.

Const.

my

your

CLASS IV.

A,

people.

nv 02

>KV

r]7pv

n*is®

"•95 SEV

0^85

B.

arrow.

YU

rn v?n

*T-?n

o v ^n v?n

ô ° P v ¥ n

c. statute.

ph

•PO ^pn

*ipn

D pn ^pn ^pn

op'pn

THE NOUN. 45

5 0 . Notes on the Changeable Nouns, Masculine:— CLASS I.—Some nouns with two <13D prefer P^n in inflection to

nnSl. Such are "TJ? garment, ^ 3 5 , Q ^ J S , ^ 3 9 ; '"^p ^ r a ^ , v"??p, annp, n?p.

The plurals of n p (E) and of H\t ( F ) should be DV11&, DVTT, according to the rule of Segolate nouns, but these forms do not exist.

CLASS II.—According to the rule in § 15, 3, p. 13, where two DW£> would begin a word, the first $)¥ is changed into a P^n; hence *SF[ and not 'TOT.

The nouns on the model of n*Ttt? ( D ) retain the TPi? in most forms. The H is dropped. These forms are similar to those of Class I I I . (c) TV$P, and frequently have the feminine ending in the plural.

CLASS I I I .—In nouns of the ( B ) type, where the second letter is not a % the form with the suffix of the 2nd person mas. sing, takes the vowel too ; thus "W*, T P ? 1 \ All Participles are inflected in this way.

CLASS IV.—The characteristics of these nouns are: (1) The appearance of the strong Dogesh when the pronominal suffixes are added. (2) The change of the long vowels V£p> "HS and oVin into the short vowels Hfl5 (as in A) , P ^ O (as in B) , and V'^P (or ]bpT V9RJ (as in c).

5 0 a . Several monosyllabic nouns do not conform to these rule*. Such are:—

1. 2$ father; flS brother; ] ? son; i"12l daughter; TIB mouth. For these nouns, see Irregular Nouns, § 55, p. 54.

2. ni blood, tt (const.), ^ 9 * [ ^ , '™, E ^ . PL D ^ , W (const.), T9"=I, V1?% ° 0 ^ .

3. ^H mountain, PI. D'Hn. p n n i s also usecl; T j r j PI. DniPJ,

4. T Aarcdf (f.), T (const.), n j , 111 , HJ, B ? T . DTT . Dual D>TT

(see § 54, 1, p. 53).

5. QV day, QV (const.), W . PI. D ^ T , ^ (const.), (in poetry

1 4 6 STUDENT'S HEBREW GRAMMAR.

6. VI? tree, ^?5, *[?S. PI. ^ ? 5 , ^ 5 (const.), ^ ? , T ? S , Y*??.

7. ^ 2 city (f.), ^ V (const.), 'TV. PL D q ? , T ? (const.), q ? ,

H. tt?rfn Aearf, tt?rfi (const.), *$tin. PL D^fcTJ, ^ttftq (const.), vtphq, D^#*q.

9. -via? ox. PL oq5#, nid. 10. nw name, nw or -Q«? (const.), ">£«*, *J$P, TJ$t£ iBtp, H£t£

snstp, o??tp, DBtp. pi. niagJ, ntotp (const.)', N£ri»t£ oflibtp. 11. i f r prmce, ^ (const.), q?>, Tlfc, B y W . PL D q f r

E X E R C I S E 11. (Ow J^f#iw o / Class I.J

A. Decline in Singular and P lu ra l :— nb? (A.) nvw (C) - n j (B.) a n h p . ) "rpo (A.) w^n (F.

B. Trans la te :— irrp1? ^ i^ n n ^ 3. n^rq?n ^009 2. *i#M br>3 i. D pb n ^35 b? 6. WOWl asvjibto 5. QVb ^"H n^yn 4. .•I33iri3 10. b^nrpi ^ntp 9. ?~)2 bs 8. VTDPI riis 7

C. n|5?i* 3. i3"nb q?P Tfb?.i* 2. iqyj-btf cn"7?« ^9^*5* 1. nisntf DJib ] ;w o. nbbtp' nto qq** 4. Qipftn jnwa «l!!l» 7. nj^rr ^ i n b nab s rr jiafrq 6. Qqq« °^b$

.Tf w b?3 *rq?# b?3 8. ibn bp ^ M D^n^n-ny D. Trans l a t e :—

1. My sacrifices. 2. His vow and his oath. 3. The fruit of his vineyards. 4. Our bread and our wine. 5. Your new garments . 6. My ways are l ike your ways. 7. The ways of the r ighteous are pure. 8. The kings of their land are wicked. 9. And his servant gave unto them all the i r books. 10. These are the princes of the tr ibes of Israel.

* For these Verbs, see Vocabulary I., pas e 173.

J

THE NOUN. 4 7

EXERCISE 12. (On Nouns of Class II)

A. Decline in Singular and Plural:— btfte, ]3#, -1$; rojj (pl. D^jj), 0^9 i n plural only.

B. Translate:— Tira^ *F3*te 3. vpjrn bsntsrj \?pT 2. n^T^n n» l. •ns nnq K-351 6. bs ^n^ 5. -lâ 7353 ayiDrri 4. en b "»?-)« n-?n s. ^7?sn ^b^n >^b vjQ-bp Vs*i* 7. lF.-tn ^5 nyr "fks TO Q^y? 10. mwb-bp ipq rnirn 9. T??1?

.D^5-b« D Q 12. r o n niip'ZL Tjb _ 11. vbtra C. Translate:—

1. Upon your face. 2. Our neighbours. 3. The clouds of the glory of his greatness. 4. Our elders and our companions. 5. I have many bottles of wine. 6. And the girl fell* upon her face to the ground. 7. The ways of God are upright and all His words are truth. 8. All the dead bodies were upon the face of the field. 9. His field and his land are mine. 10. These are the proverbs of the wise men of our king.

EXERCISE 13. (On Nouns of Class III)

A. Decline in Singular and Plural:— nfrs©, ttnj?9, bîp, ngfs, M W .

B. Translate :— nani 3. vs'si nn?n tjb^ >ptro 2. DTib^ *o$bft 1. D^bii| 5. D^^n ^3?b? D sn 4. Tywb nsn$5 -insn^ v??bp 8. ?p©aittri PSRT 7. n p tsstpn ibi e. ^nb# ^ E -n$ NI*I 10. Q'Htth rrt ^9ate 9. n ^ i ^ r n D^qbn onsi 12. Vl^m pipt^n Nib^'ntT]?^ 11. nroi&n arnfrSB

* For these Verbs, see Vocabulary I., page 173. f Throughout this book, the abbreviation Tl stands for HliT the Lord.


C. Translate:—

1. The shepherds of Lot. 2. Unto the messengers of the king. 3. Thy (/.) Redeemer is the Holy One of Israel. 4. Their wicked judges. 5. The deeds of our enemies. 6. The enemies of David are my enemies. 7. The camp of the king of Syria. 8. My Creator and my Redeemer. 9. The physicians are wise. 10. And David sent all his messengers unto his camp.

EXERCISE 14. (On Nouns of Class IV.)

A. Decline in Singular and Plural:—

E7N, n y , Vto, ON (pi. rYtetf), D^T.

B. Translate:—

bipbipn 4. nVn?n ia?« 3. iyw SS 2. D^Mq .^3 \%

^ i#*q n^« 6. pqtf 95 bv 5. lips *»T Q?l*n,j nps! intpp-ns np*i 7. orrnya Dnbqs bs aqiott? nbsn: bsnp^ -ns npni 9. iaJri-15 i*rn ia orn b? T_ 8. i"r;s vsri-nî

.Ti?q5 ta^n ^b ^nf 10. Q ryn ^13 n'-to

C. Translate:—

1. My dear mother. 2. The waves of the mighty seas. 3. Great is his name in all the land. 4. Where are my bow and my arrows ? 5. In the indignation of his anger. 6. The princes of Pharaoh and his servants. 7. What is this blood upon thy hands ? 8. My people are like thy people. 9. And he kept the statutes of his king all his days. 10. And Esau said in his heart.

* Let be.

THE NOUN. 4 9

5 0 b . Further peculiarities of Nouns (not included in the

above four Classes) :—

1. P'tST remembrance, fHDT (const.), \3il5?-

2. Nouns ending in P!; as JlV) (f.) spirit, wind, breath, HVl

(const.)., *Piri, ^Pin. Plural D inD.

WWti anoMed one, Messiah, ITB>a (const.), TPB>&, ^ h ^ t t .

n |T» a/far, HSTft (const.), ^3T0, ^ J O . Plural Mir tÔ,

3. ^Hfc fe»tf, ^ i l « , TJ^HN. Plural D^PIK.

^ 5 <YWM*/, ^ O f Plural D ^ £ f

pfi «ftfe/rf, *3Jfc. Plural D\?Jft.

D^?£^ (used only in the plural) heaven, *fi&? (const.), pftfe?>

W , D O W T T v •• ;

5 0 c . ifow to parse a Noun. Examples :—(1) , segolate

noun, from T ? 0 ; masculine, singular, with preposition 7

meaning to, and pronominal suffix of the 1st person singular

common. Translation: to my king. (2) ^15*71, Noun from

iyi', masculine, plural, construct, with conjunction ) and.

Translation : and words of.

C H A P T E R V I .

DECLENSION OF NOUNS—(continued).

51a. Feminine Forms.—There are Three Classes of Feminine

Nouns, with changeable vowel:— E


Class I.—These mostly end in H—, and are derived direct

from the masculine segolafce nouns (see § 48). T h u s : —

queen, fern, derived from T?X5, mas.

The inflections of these nouns resemble those of

the masculine segolates.

Class I I .—All these end iu PI—, and have the vowel fDD

or n ¥ before the last vowel. I n inflection, th is vowel

(called the penul t imate , i.e., last bu t one) is changed.

Examples :—PlplV righteousness; !"|J£J> sleep.

Class I I I .—These nouns end in fi—, and resemble the

masculine segolates. Examples :—rnijN letter;

skull.

51b. Changeable Nouns.—Feminine.

CLASS I.

SING.

Absol.

Const.

my

thy

A.

queen.

B.

reproach, n91CT

ns^ri

PLUR.

Absol.

Const.

my

your

queen.

ntobE VTbbB

B.

reproach.

nianq nisnq ^nis-iq

THE NOUN. 5 1

51c.

SING.

Absol.

Const.

my

thy

PLUR.

Absol.

Const.

my

your

CLASS II.

A.

righteousness ni?T? ripis

*rop"7S

nip7? nipi?

vrvn?

DycviPis

B.

cry. nP¥?

\np^?

nip^t riipst

VTipSJ Mvripjr

c.

sleep.

i"W

natp

niattf* niatp"

V_rtaa; oyniatp"

51d. CLASS III.

SING.

Absol.

Const.

my

thy

PLUR.

Absol.

Const.

my

your

letter.

rnatf

rras

nrm nnstf

VThSN

D^rvnaN

5 2 . Notes o?i the Feminine Changeable Nouns,

CLASS I.—rtzrin waste, pi. riinnrj.

CLASS II .—The noun njtt? year has a Plural form &}$, \}?J (const.) ; in poetry, f ^ l p , nfatp (const.) are used.

Many nouns of this Class take the form ^ 7 7 or ^ 7 7 in the

Construct and inflected forms. Thus :—

n ? b ^ p kingdom, Const. n j ^ P B , V?pb*?9.

nriQtt?ip family, „ n n ' s i ^ p , \nng>tpp.

The noun ^ p l ^ ground, has the forms n^lfc? (const.), V1E1.N.

CLASS III.—Like the Masculine Segolates, some nouns take other vowels in inflection. Thus : J^H.5| lady, mistress: M?n2?; rrplpto hire, reward: ^~pWK.

* rJhe plural forms of this noun do not exist. E 2


Some nouns take a Y£i? in the Plural absolute form. Thus : rrffitpZ? office: PI. ninp?fe, Const, n h S t p p ; n ? 3 § ring: PI. ni^'to, Const, ni^ta.

The nouns HtpS shame, skull, are inflected with f7?j?. Thus: V-ltp?, ^b?b? . .

The noun Hj'-J door, has Plural rrinb?, Const, n inbn.

EXERCISE 15. (OK Nouns of Classes I, II, III.)

A. Decline in Singular and Plural:— nvp\ n^n , n^?s? n ^ , n^s, rgyt^p.

B. Translate and parse each noun :— nitthq nibfctp 3. ^ « nghVi fl?fob 2. irns^n Tin 1. tjj.ibefew D^Vto bs n^b» Ô^bte 5. ^sb ntatpnB 4.

. -ii"Tj n i l bp? C Translate:—

1. The abomination of Egypt. 2. His vengeance is upon the nations. 3. How precious is thy kindness, O God, and thy righteousness to the upright (pi.) of heart. 4. From thy work upon the day of the Sabbath. 5. The families of the tribes of Israel. 6. My thoughts are not* your thoughts. 7. If I am your Lord, where is my glory ? 8. From thy land and from thy kindred. 9. And he took his mantle from upon the altar of stones. 10. And he did all these things in his anger, with wrath and with rebukes of wrath.

53. Further Peculiarities of Feminine Nouns.

1. Nouns ending in ffl make their plural HI*—.

Examples :—ttDS& kingdom, PL HIOSD.

(Exception: rVHS? ordinance, PI. JTHy).

2. Nouns ending in )V— make their plural Hi*—.

* «?, placed first in the sentence.

THE NOUN. 5 3

Examples:—]V3B>a picture, PL nV3E>& ; n^SS? Ammonite

woman, PL HV3QV • (Exception: n^Pl s/âr, PL Hin^n) . 3. nOX maidservant, ^n»K . PL n i n » N , niHfiX (const.),

Tnn&NLT

n&ns 6<?«s*, ca^/r, nana (const.), ' 'nana. PI. ni&n?. ni&ns (const.).

w h s or niha coat, W D . PI. nuna, nuns (const). (const,),

(const.).

n ip e«A PI. nwp. n#J3 bow, <fi\&p. PI. nin^j?, nin^p (const.).

54 . D u a l N o u n s . Nouns in the Dual form are inflected like the Masculine

Plural of Nouns. Examples :—

1. T hand (f.), (see § 50a, 4), Dual DH*; C o n s t - *T> * T ,

YTT> ^T> 1'T, CH!> ^T> MH.S D?'T-2. M3 (/.), Dual D1&33 pair of icings; Const. ^£33.

3. S^n (/.), „ rshT\ feet; „ ^ P L

4. p;(/.)> » Q' y w; » W 5. }TX ( / ) , „ D^TN *ws; „ ^T«.

6. C|3 (/.), „ D*S3 Aflnrfs; „ *§3.

7. nfiB>(/.), „ D^nfi %>; „ ^ ^ .

The Nouns SjT, j?S a n d jtk belong to the Segolates; S]33 to Class I I . Masculine, n££? to Class II . Feminine, Sj3 to Class IV. Masculine.

iV.2?.—Nouns in the Dual agree with Adjectives (see § 33, p. 30) and Verbs in the Plural.


55. I r r e g u l a r

These are Nouns of peculiar formation

Sing. Const.

Plur. Const.

father.

ns DM (or 'OS)

•ON

TO* TO

^ns (or -in^N) rp?« •wnw

D ^ b ? *

on^5B*

nins ntay

fining

fpnina •q^niny Y*/rta8

nv^bbj

soyrbs D^^tafe?* drpntagi*

brother.

ns ^ns >ns

Tp™

^>™ vnw (or n^nw)

n^ns •i3^n«

drmsi

drprra

•>nw nw

>nw r^w ^ H H VW

rnriH •WTO

d^nb? drrnb?

sister.

ninw rrinb?

^ninw TOinsi tjnina ininb*

nnin^ •lariinb?

drains dphb?

ni>n« >ni>n« (or ^ning)

TO^TO (or l^riinB) Tpnvow (or "spninH) Y ^ O N (or vninbf)

jrcrpns (or nyvinb*) ^ v r i ^ s (or wciing)

man.

W^

tt^N

^ N

is^tf

ws« ia^M

ntt?>«

D ^ 3 »

^ 3 8 ^ ? 8

*p#?8 Tf!tt?5B VttbSj

rrgfciS •Wgttb*

d D ^ H

drpttbs

5 5 a . Notes on the Irregular Nouns :—

(1) The original forms of Wy and n&N were *£)« (or ttfjS) and HtWN. Hence the plural d ttfjb$? which meant both men and women. The word for women became d ttfS by the falling away of the « .

* The feminines of the suffixes your and their are not written out here, but are easily derived from the masculines by changing 0 into \.

THE NOUN.

Nouns. t ha t va ry from the usual classes:—

woman

n$« n$s

vyitpN

^ntp'tf

i n ^s

n^tpj

*vfe ^ ?

TO TO VW2

n^? ^ # 3

D?^3 arpttfa

•

house.

rva rps

^T?

^ 3 im3

n r r s • ^ fT3

DJiTSl

T

o^na

'#£ ^ 3

T f l ? rpris vna

rpj-igt

ôg ayra i o n ^ a

son.

13

"1?

^?

^3? H32

^3? a??3

D33 T • ' T

"35

^? T ^

TO voa

nâ

^ 3 ? D?N33

0^33

daughter.

ns n?

^ 3 ^ 3

in ? nna ^ n a

E?^3 cn3

nba rrb3

VTias

Tni33 ijvriasi

vnia3 nîasi wnia?

D^crias Dn\nia3

vessel.

^ s -bs

^?? f???

D^bs

*>3

*?2>

*pbs

T^> vbs

rnbs

^ b ? D ? ^ 3

DiT*??

ivater.

nyi

WIS (or ^ )

W B

T ^ B 7ptt>$ Y ^ t t

r p ^ s

WE^S

• 3 ^ $ E H ^ E

mouth.

H5

^

9 TpQ

sin^Q (or Y*B)

rpa ^ 5

D ^ B

tarns

ni*?

The plural D^tp^S (instead of Q^tpJS) occurs only three times in the Bible. The phrase ttf^S E^M means each man.

(2) 13 has a second construct form "13. In poetry, the forms ^33 and *123 are also used for the construct.

(3) r i 3 was originally # 3 3 (the feminine of 13), hence the Dogesh in the inflected forms.

(4) TIB has two other plural forms, E^B and ni>B^B.


EXERCISE 16. A. Translate —

any? *»933 by 2. vn$Vt ittnb^ i^bi v ? ^ ^^7 1. niaan 5. vptoss *gbtf rrits sb 4. 10ptf: 13 *R?P N^ 3.

B. 1. And he made an altar of gold and all its vessels.

2. And he gave unto him his daughter for a wife. 3. My sons are swifter than eagles. 4. His father and his mother are in the field. 5. Unto their children's children. 6. Each man according to the house of his fathers. 7. Upon the houses of the children of Israel. 8. Thou and thy son and thy daughter and thy (man) servant and thy maidservant. 9. The words of thy mouth are holy unto thy children. 10. The earrings of gold which are in the ears of your wives, your sons and your daughters.

CHAPTER VII.

Particles.*

SECTION 2.

56. Other Inseparable Particles.

11. A. Interrogative.—When prefixed to a word, |"1 (or T\ when followed by a **Vf or compound &W), denotes a question, and is called Interrogative. Examples :—^fiKTlPl wilt thou keep ? DfWTll do you know f

Note.—The T\ has sometimes the vowel ^ P , as pTHPl is it strong ? I t may be translated by whether, as DK Nfl rQiCSPl flST) whether it is good or bad ?

* See pp. 22-24.

PARTICLES. 57

B. Local.—When placed at the end of a Noun, T\— denotes

the direction towards, and is called Local or Locative. Examples :

HXIX (from p N ) towards the land, PI&HV9 towards Egypt.

C. Vocative.—H with Dogesh in the next letter, is also

used as a sign of the Vocative: T?QH 0 king.

57. Part ic les w i t h Pronomina l Suffixes.

1. "MX or MX, used :—

(a) As sign of the Accusative Case after a Transitive Verb; it is then not translated by a special word

(««? § 35, p. 31).

(b) With Pronominal Suffixes. It then forms the Accusative of the Personal Pronoun :—

*flfc me.

^HX thee, mas.

^HK thee, fem.

ifitf him.

ftflX for.

MHK y0«-, mas.

pHX you, fem.

DHX tffo/w, mas.

jHX £A?/w, fem.

(c) As a Preposition, meaning «r#A :-

"VM watfA tffoe, mas.

^fttf «nYA zfotf, fem.

)F\it uith him.

PlftX with her.

T •

DDfttf wtth Vou> m a s*

pfiN ^ A /<?w, fem.

DFlX ^ A tfAm, mas.

jfitf with them, fem.


(d) "JlNt is sometimes prefixed to the nominative to a

verb in the passive voice. Example :—TDH?

TVS?"T\X and unto Enoch teas born Irad. H^XJTlN

is nominative to the Passive Verb

2. W\ there is, exists, the opposite of TK (see page 61).

Examples: — X ^ 3 W\ there is a prophet in Israel.

*7 ^ there is to me, (i.e., I have). With pronominal suffixes: TfBJ

thou art, SlX&\ he is, DpfcJ Vou are-

Observe the idiom : DD^S}~riX $\ it is your desire (lit. it is

with your soul).

3. P13/T, JPI behold, lo! With suffixes: ^liPl, (pausal form

^3H J ^ o « me /) T[3Pi , 1j3H, 13P1, PI3PI, U3H, DMfl, MPI.

4. nty yetf, ,9^7/. With suffixes : Hty, *3lty ^ ^ J ^ w ( o r

w ) M spny, ipty sianiy, nrrty, tinty, Dpniy, Dity.

58. Separable Preposit ions.

1. ^ 3 between [between fm /, ^2) ^ 3 or 7 ^3 -

Examples :—^3^ ^ 3 between me and thee; yb a t o }*3 fo-

tween good and evil]. With suffixes: ^ 3 , ^ 3 , ^% W 3 ,

nra, «^3 oyrtra), D?\r3> orwa (Dnfra).

2. D S ^ A . With suffixes: •©» (HBJJ), ^Stf, *S|S?, etc.

8. S^X at the side of, by. With suffixes : ^ ¥ K , ^ V K , e t c-

PARTICLES. 5 9

59. The following Prepositions are used in the Plural form when joined to Pronominal Suffixes :—

4. 7X unto; 5. "lllNS behind, after; 6. ^!3p round

about; 7. 1)3 until; 8. 7p upon; 9. P,Hfl beneath,

instead of.

4. -^K wwfo. With Suffixes: ^ X , ^ N ' T - ^ J V ^ >

n\bx, WSN, D^SN, o r ig

in poetry, vX «mfo, lift vN unto them.

5. nriN or n n X fl/fcr. With Suffixes: nPtN, ^HIIN,

^nnx , vnriK, etc.

6. n ^ D rcw/w* about. With suffixes: TVD^D, f H h * ? ?

(or "?|^3p), Vr i l ^np (or V^?D), etc.

iVoite.—The forms in brackets are derived from an assumed Masculine Plural D^! lP - The others are from a Feminine

piurai n in^p . 7. -ny «mftV. With suffixes: Htf, ^Ht t , Vltf, CpHg.

8. -Sy t«/Hw. with suffixes: ^Sy, ^ y , ^S», vSy.rpSy, «•!?», D^py, on^y.

In poetry, ^7$ upon, upon them.

9. T\HF\ beneath, instead of With suffixes: ^fiftR (or

^nrifi) instead of me, ^PlPlfi, VPlflJ-l, D ^ n n f l .


6 0 . Other prepositions with suffixes are :—

i. « * » on account of, for the sake of, T?;.!l3, etc.

2. H ^ ? 3 except, H ^ S l , ^ " J V ^ , etc.

3. y(2^ for the sake of, n t t g S , etc.

4. l y a , IBS behind, on behalf of, H573, etc.

5. "TtinS «w tte »w<fetf o/ (Const, form of the Noun "5p.Fl),

•ataa, ^ n a , ipina or *p3^na, inin?, etc.

6. TvAl besides, except, ^TyW, DZJfiTIT, etc.

7. |y&S /or *A« sa£e of, *Wtb, )Nth, M M b S .

fe/bre (lit., to the face of; Const, form of the Noun

MB) . Adverb of place: ^ , ^^S 1?, "pS 1?, V ^ , iTOS?,

WJB1?, B^lfe Drrjs'?. 9. TJJ before, opposite, ' "p i , etc.

o^r against, towards, TOS?, etc.

61. Affirmative and Negat ive Part icles .

A. Affirmative Particle : $\ there is {see p. 58).

B. Negative Particles : X7, 7tf,

(1) K7 woA Used with the finite verb, to express direct

negation. Examples:—7tDj5 A# sfcw; 7DP N? Atf flfo'd

(2) "7X mtf (always followed by a *]!?»). Used only with

the future of the verb (2nd and 3rd person) in the

5p.Fl

PARTICLES. 61

sense of prohibition, corresponding to the English do not.

The form of the future with 7X is called the negative

jussive. See, for explanation of this term, under the

Tenses of the Verb, p. 97. Examples :—/bpPl thou wilt

slay; 7bpJV 7X do not slay (a prohibition) ; vbpll $?

thou wilt not slay (a statement of fact).

(3) p « * (Pausal form ptf) not.

(a) Used only with nouns and participles as the

opposite of £J>\ Examples:—p^'DX ftf A3 B?P)

whether there is a tree in it or not; JSS? EJ N pX

there is not a man (no man) with as.

(b) With pronominal suffixes: *3VN, ^ X , ^ t f ,

wrs, na N, urn DMW, om Examples:—D3j!np3 *$-!*$ % am n°t in four

midst; D^Stf iHX HpS *3 tiJW and he was not,

for God had taken him.

Examples of p x with Participles :—

SH3 ^ ^ f i P ^ ^3 /or Mordecai would not bow, was

not bowing; D\3*15?J$/b D3^X y# #r6 not believing,

ye do not believe.

(4) J3 /<?s£ (always followed by a *]#£).

(5) ^ 7 3 7 in order not to, used only with infinitives.

(6) 7 3 is a form used in poetry only, for X7 not.

\\WQ means from nothing ; also, instead of H3SD or n*XO, whence ?


6 3 . Other Inflected Particles.

1. n*K, X where ? Pl3*K wA*ra art thou ? VX wA*re is he?

D*X tr Aer<? we they ?

2. !l1p3 among, in the midst of; ^SHpS M way weefetf ;

tenia, etc. a. nnS «/<me; ^ T ? by myself alone; ^ H j ? > etc-

(Infin. Kal of the Verb X ID = fo we£) towards;

-ranch towards me; etc

Note.—T)V2L and 121? (like ^Sfr and ^ i n ? § 60) are

nouns with prepositions attached to them.

List of Uninfected Particles generally in use.

• *!« or.

perhaps,

however, but.

TNt, \TX then (TXE since).

•SpN , PO^K how f

nb'N where f

|?N surely, but.

hit if. DN */.

j£N # w true ! amen !

&OX i beseech thee !

FUN whither ? T T

&X e^m, also.

v 3 without.

/ar fo # / God forbid !

D"lt? S /ore (adverb of time).

TJfT together.

jST because.

nJPfcO w^m, as.

*3 /or, £w, w?Aew.

PARTICLES. 6 3

N3, [K3X] I (or we) beseech thee (or you) !

i p y because, in reward for.

nb A#ra

DXllJS suddenly.

yjlS suddenly,

pi only.

T T

T&ft continually.


\ns D^naten nw rr»3 " ^ P P QH?9 rf?% ^"« W?l l.

?jb$ TN 4. nsjM ib - I S ^ I b i i | bipp vbw *np*i 3. l$n on^bs n»ri*5 5. v r p bDp n:n??E ^MIS npt •psn nip ]>sn ne^^ 6. wn-'js QS'H.yT? ru-iy-os ?ipi> /rp-bs nttfy ^ s n : rr toTton ]p-rn np>n^ Dibttfn 7. Efl« W5 ^ 2pg> onb aft ]pw 9. D?»$n nâ? nn D nbw / rp nw-vs nj r « 8. ^ 1 11. 1^ Q^ ^?1PP 'n* a ry 10. n*n oipftp 'n* ps 12. "inn 7 3!) nnan pp ntw nbiT|n n>?n-btf npip vws&t WJ-DW 13. 'n* ilf? rv$¥ V#) njsofl r^] n ? ? n : Drrbst -i»rf*i nno^n nrwnjh MSJI 14. Di*rr T.?^P in

* Throughout this book, the abbreviation 'PI stands for PI IT the Lord. f I have found.

DN"*3 except, but.

p 7 therefore.

TW7 why ?

TXfi whence ?

»Vtb «?Ay ?

^ti ivhenever.

rTirilb quickly. sT\fo when ?


•5ptf i? 16. ^nipU? DS1] ^TOS E3 ""T ? &12V ^2H 15. bsnttt? 35 ^ ^ a 17. ^ n s -la^s "i?3rr| âs-by nb?s*

nnw nnrf^ n ^ s vjs bs nbbtp bb^_ is. obbb sin ni« : ÔBE n-jn rpaa bi-r} ^ N 19. *r-pb t^ribsn mrr

B. Translate:—

1. Is there a place in thy (./!) father's house for me and my men ? 2. There was no man from the men of the house there in the house. 3. My blessing shall be upon thee, and upon all thy children who are here with thee. 4. You shall be more holy than all the nations that are around you, for I am with you. 5. And she went after him to Hebron, to the land of the children of Israel. 6. For thine eyes and thy heart are not unto wisdom but unto folly. 7. And the fool said in his heart, There is no God. 8. There is to us an old father in the land of Israel. 9. Surely there is a God to Israel, and there is no God like him. 10. And the king went towards the north, and his son reigned in his stead.

CHAPTER VIII.

63. The Numerals.

The Numerals are divided into two classes:—

A. Cardinals; answering the question, How many? as one, two, twenty.

B. Ordinals; answering the question, In what order? as first, second, third.

* Shall I go up.

NUMERALS. 65

64a

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Fr

Cardinal Numbers. MASCULINE FOKMS.

Absolute.

in$

&.W nwbw nv?1« n^bq nw

nystf n±^ ny^p n'W

Construct,

im

W r\vhw

nyrix fiEtoq nsrs?

p y ^ ^

n±K> ny^ri nW$

FEMININE FORMS. Absolute.

nnx (pausal f lHX)

D W

vfa? v*y* Eton

£>{•>

y3^ n.3b^ y ^ *&$

Construct.

Jinx

V?# B ^

JETO Eton

# #

W H ^

TO Ty

om 11 to 19, the mas. and fem. have one form each.

MASCULINE.

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

r nb'y D ^

1 ivy ^ icrr n&?W i&y nyrix -i£?y i ron

T T T •

nk>y nine* T T T ; •

ne'y mb#

F

P

FEMININE.

.rrpy r\m

m W D»PIB>

ni^y w rnb>y #•?# n-ry ya-iK rn#>y Eton

n-i^y ^

rwy jn&r nnfew robs? ™y yeto


Observe that the Masculines have been formed by adding *")£?$)

10 to the masculine unit, and the Feminines by adding PHEW

10 to the feminine unit.

6 4 b . The numerals 20 to 90 end in D^—, and are of common gender.

20 [ S^y I 6 0 I B*B>#

30 D*B>SB* 70 D ^ 5 #

40 D W X 80 &±$

50 I D^bn | 90 I o w n

The intermediate numbers are formed as follows: 21 (with

a masculine noun) DnBTfl " ^ o r ^DS! ^ 1 ^ 9 2 ( w i t h a

feminine noun) DWrV) D W or tffiB*! DWS>fi.

64c.

100

200

300

400

500

600

700

800

900

PI. ri\xp

(Dual of HK&)

niK» Eton

nixa nabtf ni«D y&n

1,000 |

2,000

3,000

4,000

1 5,000

10,000

| 20,000

PI. D*|>7X thozisands

(Dual of S|?K);' Const. »s9s-

D^SSN n ^ n (And so on, using

the mas. const, with D*a^).

nirn, Kin, nian D*ra-i

NUMERALS. 67

65. Rules of the use of Cardinal Numbers.

1. They agree in gender with the noun to which they are joined. Examples: —one man HJIX fcJ^tf; twelve daughters

n w Mptf ntoa.

2. The Absolute form of the Numeral may be placed either before or after the noun. Examples :—two women D ^ J ^$0 or D W D*Bfo, ten boys Dnstt H W or rTlBW D ^ M . The Construct form of the Numeral always precedes the noun. Example:— three days.

3. Hence there are three ways of expressing a number.

Seven days may be rendered, (1) D*£5* !™IS7!l ? (2) D ^ T ftSD^

(3) nsn# DW.

4. The Numeral ^TllX owe, is treated like an Adjective. It, therefore, follows the noun, except in the Construct form, one man 1HX fflii. As Predicate, IHJSt, like any other Adjective, may precede the noun (see § 32, p. 30). Our God is one wrbx ma or ma wrbx. nriN is sometimes used in the sense of a certain, *1HK £^X a certain man. There is a plural D^fiN, meaning a few.

5. Certain nouns, that are frequently used with Numerals, remain in the singular after numbers above 10. Such nouns are: fcJ^X man, HQX cubit, DV day, H3^ year, fcJHH month, shekel. Examples: — 2J K D^J5?H fifty men, HNJb T\*$} d hundred years. But this rule does not apply if the noun is placed first; 70 shekels D*SD6? DYpfcP

F 2

68 STUDENT'S HEBEEW GRAMMAR.

6. In combining numbers, the highest number may be either first or last; with ) joining the numbers. Example:—162

d?3 i D W ] n$? or n«w D W ] B?3#-

7. The Definite Article is usually omitted with numerals. Example:—The eleven stars D^^fD *]£>$? Itlit.

But, sometimes, the D is added to the noun. Example:— The Ten Words (Commandments) D n ^ H n i2W.

For ^6 with 1P1K, the Definite Article is always used.

Example:—77*6 one king 'IPIXPI T?SP1.

8. To express the age of a person, add the word " |3 (for a male) or H3 ( r o r a female). Examples:—And Isaac teas sixty

years old pp&y D^fe?"|5 PCÎ > Sarah teas ninety years old fiS

9. Observe the construction with the word years; as, 127

years D ^ JftBh H ^ DnfcW Pfl# HX&; 403 y*ar« ^ W

10. About is expressed by 3 . Examples :—About 400 m w

ifaoA with numerals: too 00c/* EW# D ^ # ; fourfold DW2P11K (Dual of PlMTlK); sevenfold DTBftBJ (Dual of PlMBfy .yow too D 3 ^ , Me too of us WiBf; you three DDf lB^^ /

11. In answer to the question ZZbw m«wy ymrs &7/ wow? prefix PIT (used adverbially in the sense of DVPl HT ^7/ tfAw r%) to the numeral; PTJB> DH^5? ^1 ^ S 6 toewtfy ?/mrs.

NUMERALS. 69

6 6 . B. Ordinal Numbers.

1st

2nd

3rd

4th

5th

6th

7th

8th

9th

10th

MASCULINE.

i paten w

i&'htf ^ r i

*#'&5 »$#

Wp^ V1?& Wn 7W

FEMININE.

nii^xn JTJtf

rvsrW jva^n

rvBôri nw

rvy*3# rw#? rwtffi nnw

All other Ordinals are expressed by the Cardinal Numbers. 'Examples:—17 th day DV "tEW ny!l£>; in the 50th year

67 . JRW&« 0/ £A£ i sg O/ Ordinal Numbers.

1. Ordinals to the number 10 are used like Adjectives. Examples:—the first month jifc^nn BHhPl, ^ Me>^ ^wr

2. In counting years and the days of the month, the Cardinals are frequently used instead of the Ordinals. Examples : on the first day of the month GJHh? i n ^ 3 , on the fifth day of the month n ^ f i n 3 , in the second year U^P^f fOB^l.


68. Fractions.

1. Half i W l , Const. ^ H (VXI1 half of it), IVXn& (a

feminine form); £ f) i rViTiTl (and so on, using the

feminine form of the Ordinals).

Other forms of fractions are: \ yyi, }Dh; I WISH; ô

n n ^ S f , jn^J? (plural DtflBV tenth-parts).

The fractions always precede the Noun. Example : rVSTi")

pnil a fourth part of a hin.

2. $002£ o/J jjp or {portion). Example :— Jib Hip*! (or

aw^ A0 fo0& som£ of the men; anything T\tiWfo or

"D1^; #// ^ 3 , all of us )j?2; all of you D5?3' ^ o / them D?3.

EXEKCISE 18. A. Translate:—

]^p 3. roa? nrna?3p: D a? sna? 15 2. ^ $ n a i ^ >n^ i. anh nbv '•nato? 5. DV ^yrns. Y$n *r\y_ 4. nb?£iT ann H-p? n^s 7. ny5tp ny;ia? a ^ n fpsia 6. annb i n ^ na?bp-i nb« ni«n a;a? anib|b?b nninb? n>nb bsnip? ^3 Q ann aWn D?b n-jn arjinn s. Q^ppl niM» atop? ^?bs njHs nyw D'nfejn 373$ 9. ™&V ^7PV D?1? ^ n P^"l nVi*! ma? niM8 23aft ma? D toah Die?? nbahns >rn 10. n«£tf b^na . ^3i{; bb1? nN$b D ^ B rna?y 11. n t o n^s i3p?1 nropb rfrb na^rr n n ^ s i 12. nnrnb nbtfl nbsb ma? rnipy D rip rntp3 13. ^™n a?32b ]\nn nwzn nbv-n^p ahn1? "W? nanbt?3 in# Di>3 14. b^na^ Tjbpb oân^n ny?B^ ^nwn ansib ]i"iyy itito? 15. "ns afrh «.in

NUMERALS. 7 1

D>&tt7 ^ 5 naT5?n-n« by*] 16. rin^ rbb mynbv ntibufa \3¥?bp nnt ni37§e 'tfjttfa innp Djna^ i sm na«i: i^w HEN c^™ D^?;3 ^ 5 3 nb«n rhv-vn cnt^rr bs nan 17. i^?

: TOO; D^btp ttfbttf ]a POSl naip c^btp-)3 ngtesi is.

B. 1. And God created (fcOl*!) upon the sixth day all the cattle of the field and also the man. 2. I have two thousand shekels with me in my house and two hundred sheep in the field, which is distant from this place about fifty-six cubits. 3. And Abraham lived one hundred and seventy-five years and he died. 4. In the seventh year of (^) king Ahab, there were four hundred and fifty priests of Baal in the land of Israel. 5. And all the days of Lamech were seven hundred and seventy-seven years. 6. And the flood was forty days upon the earth. 7. And it came to pass in the six hundred and first year, in the first month, on the first day of the month. 8. And Moses gave to the children of Israel the ten commandments in the third month on the sixth day of the month. 9. Upon the fifteenth day of the month Nisan, there is a holy festival to us all, 10. This altar is twenty cubits and a half in height, and eighteen cubits in breadth. 11. And all the numberings of the children of Israel to the house of their fathers from twenty years old and upwards were six hundred (thousand)* and three thousand and fifty-five. 12, My son is 18 years old and my daughter 14 years old to-day. 13. One day in Thy courts is better than a thousand years in the house of the greatest king. 14. How old art thou ? ( = How many are the days of thy life ?) My age is ( = the days

* Words in round brackets are to be expressed in the Hebrew, though omitted in the English <


of my life are) eighty-eight. 15. Bender into Hebrew: 25, 151, 938, 5656, 1899, 12 men, 16 horses, 181 years.

C H A P T E R I X .

6 9 . T h e V e r b .

Every verb has a root or stem consisting of three letters, to which prefixes and suffixes are added. This root is usually found in the 3rd person masculine singular of the perfect of the Kal conjugation.

There are seven modifications of the root, both in form and meaning. They are called Conjugations, and are named as follows:—

I. Kal Sp. I I Niphal ^ f i l I II . Piel W

IV. Pual hyB. V. Eiphil ^yfiH. V I Hophal ^ySH.

vi i mthpaei ^ysnn. 7 0 . Meanings of the Conjugations.

I. Kal is the simple form of the verb in the active voice.

Example:—7J3J5 he slew.*

I I Niphal is the passive of the Kal. Example:—/DM

he was slain. I t is also employed in a reflexive sense : 7&J53 he

sletv himself; IfiiSJO he guarded himself.

I I I Piel is the intensive or frequentative form of the Kal in the active voice. Forms in the Piel mean to do something thoroughly, or often, or, by declaration. Examples:—

* Although the verb ?&p is employed as the model verb, it occurs in the Bible only three times, but i3 very common in Chaldee,

THE VERB. 73

he slew violently, he murdered, or butchered; "tSB' he broke

in pieces, he shattered (from *)%$ t° break); XQtO he declared

unclean.

IV. Pual has the same meaning as the Piel, but in the

passive voice. Example :— he teas murdered.

V. Hiphil is the causative form of the Kal in the active

voice, to make or cause a person to do something. Example:—

Ttppn he caused (someone) to slay*

VI. Hophal has the same meaning as the Hiphil, but in

the passive voice. Example :— he was caused to slay, or

he caused to be slain.

VII. Hithpael is the reflexive form of the verb in the

active; it means to do some act for oneself, or by oneself, or

to oneself. Examples:— he slew himself; he

taught himself; or, to pretend, or say, of oneself: "DJriPl he

pretended to be strange; DSHJIH he declared himself to be wUe.

The variations of the meaning of the verb as distinct from the Kal should be very carefully learnt.

The first six conjugations are thus arranged in pairs:—

I. Kal ) Active, and ( of the simple idea of the

II. Niphal \ Passive ( root.

III . Piel | Active, and ( of the intensive or frequen-

IV. Pual ( Passive ( tative idea of the root.

V. Hiphil ) Active, and j of the causative idea of the VI. Hophal \ Passive ( root.

* Compare, in English, to rise and to raise ; to fall and to fell.


71. Distinguishing Signs of each Conjugation (compare the examples already given) :—

I. Kal employs the three radicals for its forms, without any addition.

II. Niphal has a 3 prefixed. In the Future, Imperative,

and second Infinitive, this 3 is omitted, and, to compensate

for its omission, a strong Dogesh is placed in the first radical

{see § 10, B, p. 8). Thus, the Future form St?j9* represents

The Dogesh in the p indicates that a 3 has been

dropped. The fuller form with the 3 is never used. In the

Imperative and second Infinitive a Pi is prefixed.

III., IV. Piel and Pual forms have a strong Dogesh in the

middle radical. The Pual has a y-lap under the first radical.

V. Hiphil has a Pi prefixed to the root, which letter is

dropped in the Future and Participle. Thus, the Future

7*Dp^ is a contraction of TtDprV, and the Participle /^tOp? of

/*£?pPl&. Most of the forms have also a h\iz pyn in the

second syllable. Examples

VI. Hophal, like the Hiphil, has the prefix Pi, which is

dropped in the Future and Participle. Thus, /fap\ and /iDpft

are contracted from vtDDIT and 7£3pnfi. The vowel of the

first syllable is ;bj? yvpr or a p-iaj?. Examples:—/0p1> T ? ^ ? -

VII. Hithpael has the prefix T\T\ added to the root, the Pi

being omitted in the Future and Participle. The Future

/t?pJV and the participle 7t?priJD are contracted from 7t?pn?T

THE VERB. 7 5

and Like the Piel and Pual, there is also a strong

Dogesh in the middle radical.

N.B.—The position of the Dogesh should be carefully noted:—

(1) In the first radical in the Niphal forms, where the 3 is omitted; i.e., in Future, Imperative, and Infinitive.

(2) In the middle radical in the Piel, Pual, and Hithpael.

72. Moods.

The following Moods exist:—

(1) Indicative. (2) Imperative. (3) Infinitive.

A special form for the Subjunctive does not exist (see however, end of next §).

73. Each Conjugation has —

A. Two Tenses*

B. Imperative (except the Pual and Hophal).

C. Infinitive, Absolute and Construct.

D. Participle (the Kal alone has two Participles).

* Most of the modern grammarians do not admit that there are real Tenses, i.e., denoting the point of time at which an action is done ; but rather, that the so-called Tenses define whether the action is completed or uncompleted. Hence, the names Perfect (denoting that the action is quite finished ; see the various translations given in 73A) , and Imperfect (denoting that it is not yet finished, including also the Potential mood, as may, might, etc.).

The Perfect and Imperfect are therefore called by these scholars Moods {i.e., pointing out the condition in which an action stands) and not Tenses. As, however, the name Mood refers to the Imperative and Infinitive, the word Tense is here retained, and the name Future is preferred to that of Imperfect, to avoid confusion with the meaning of Imperfect in other languages.


A. Tenses. There are only two Tenses—

(1) Perfect (also called Past and Preterite).

(2) Future (also called Imperfect).

For the Present Tense, see § 93, page 103.

(1) The Perfect Tense describes an action that is com

pleted at that moment. I t serves for different Tenses

in English. Thus: !Dj5 may be translated he sleic,

he has slain, he had slam, he was slaying, he had been

slaying.

(2) The Future Tense expresses the idea that the action is

incomplete, and has yet to continue. Like the Per

fect, it answers to several forms in English. Thus :

may be translated he tvill slay, he will be slaying,

he will have slain, he will have been slaying, he should

slay, he might slay, let him slay.

The Future forms are also used for the Subjunctive mood.

Example in order that he may slay.

N.B.—For the use of the Participle in a future sense,

see § 92, C, 5, page 101.

For further remarks on the Future, see § 91, page 96.

74. B. Imperative Mood is always in the 2nd person, and is

derived direct from the Future (see §' 82, p. 80). There is no

form for the Imperative in the Pual and Hophal. For Im

peratives of the 3rd person, see § 91, p. 97.

THE VEHB. 77

75. C. Infinitive Mood. There are two forms or states of

the Infinitive, the Absolute and the Construct state. The

Absolute state takes neither prefixes or suflSxes. The Construct

state, like a Noun, may have prefixed to it one of the four

Particles Jb'S'^'a (D'S'3'3)- With one of these prefixes,

the Infinitive becomes a Verbal Noun. Example:— ^ b M

in slaying. The Construct state of the Infinitive also takes the

Pronominal suffixes, like a Noun. For further remarks on

the Infinitive, see § 92, B, p. 100.

76. D. The Participle is inflected and translated exactly like

a Noun. Examples:—/tD)p a man slaying, or a slayer, D v ^ i p

men slaying or slayers, ^ D i p the slayers of, or those who slay.

The Kal alone has an active and a passive Participle. All the other six Conjugations have one Participle each. All the Participles, except those of the Kal and Niphal, commence with a ft.

For further remarks on the Participle, see § 92, C, p. 101.

77. Regular and Irregular Verbs. There are two main divisions of Verbs:—

(1) The Regular, or strong,

(2) The Irregular, or weak.

(1) A Regular, or strong, verb is one that retains its three

radicals in every form of the seven conjugations.

(2) An Irregular, or weak, verb is one whose root contains

one or more of the letters y*'Vfl'N, and which, in the course


of inflection, drops one, or even two, of its radicals. Examples of irregular verbs :—DD*1> from the root U)p to arise; Jft\ from the root jPO to give; Tp, from the root Pibj to smite.

N.B.—All rules of verbs, all addition of prefixes and suffixes, apply to the regular and irregular verbs alike.

78 . Verb-forms are made up of radicals and serviles (prefixes and suffixes denoting conjugation, gender, number, and person). The following outline of pronominal prefixes and suffixes applies to all verbs and to all conjugations alike. The mark ° represents a radical.

TABLES OF PRONOMINAL PREFIXES AND SUFFIXES USED

WITH VERBS.

Added in the Perfect (all these are suffixes).

PLURAL.

3rd pers. com. they have Y00

SINGULAR.

3rd pers. mas. he has (sX.) ° ° °

3rd pers. fern, she has Pi000

2nd pers. mas. thou hast ft ° ° °

2nd pers. fem. thou hast ft000

1st pers. com. I have •'ft000

2nd pers. mas. you have Dft ° ° °

2nd pers. fem. yoa have jft ° ° °

1st pers. com. we have J]J000

7 9 . Prefixes and suffixes to the Future. SINGULAR.

3rd pers. mas. he will ° ° °%

3rd pers. fem. she will °°°ft

2nd pers. mas. thou wilt 000ft

2nd pers. fem. thou uilt *>°00ft

1st pers. com. / shall ° ° ° X

PLURAL.

3rd pers. mas. they will ) ° ° ° *

3rd pers. fem. they will PI J ° ° ° ft

2nd pers. mas. you ivill ) ° ° ° ft

2nd pers. fem. you ivill Pl3 ° ° ° ft

1st pers. com. we shall ° ° ° 3

THE VERB. 79

8 0 . Suffixes to the Imperative (the same as the suffixes of the 2nd pers. of the Future).

2nd pers. mas. sing °°° I 2nd pers. mas. plur. !|000

2nd pers. fern. sing. * ° ° ° | 2nd pers. fern. plur. T\J ° ° °

81. Suffixes to the Participle (like nouns and adjectives).

Mas. sing. 00° i Mas. plur. D*"00

Fern. sing. H"00 or T\l°° ' M a s . fern. JYl000

The Niphal participle has J prefixed. The Piel, Pual, Hiphil, Hophal, and Hithpael have 12 prefixed.

82 . Hints upon learning the Verb.

1. Learn thoroughly the prefixes and suffixes as in the previous paragraphs.

2. Learn the form of the 3rd pers. mas. sing, of each of the Perfect and Future tenses, and attach the prefixes and suffixes required to each of these primary forms.

3. Learn all the Perfect forms together, the Future forms together, the Imperatives together, and likewise the Infinitives and Participles. This will enable the student to be constantly comparing the form of one conjugation with that of another.

4. In accordance with hint 3, commit to memory the following primary forms in their exact order:—

Perfect.—hbp, hbp), tap, tap, bvpn, taj?n, tapnn.

Notice that the names of the conjugations, with the exception of the Kal, are identical with these forms. Thus:


II. SySJ, hence Stop}; III. SttS, hence Stop; IV. SyS, hence

Step; V. ^BSH, hence S%C5j?n; VI. S&SPl, hence SlDj?n;

VII. Syfinn, hence StopHPl. The verb StfS fo warfe?, to work,

forms the root of these names.

Primary Forms of the Future: Stop*, Stop*, Stop*, Stop*, ^pj?!, Sep:, S&pn\

Imperatives.- -From the 2n<f person forms of the Future,

whence the Imperatives are derived, remove the fi. Thus,

from Sfopft, Ytopft, ^Stppfl, n^Stoptt, a r e derived the forms

/fop, */top (by change of vowel explained in § 15, 3, p. 13),

^tOp, r\j7fop. In Niphal, Hiphal, and Hithpael substitute a

Pi for the fl. In the Hiphil, the form is used to form

the Imperative {see, for reason of this, § 91, p. 97).

Primary Forms of the Imperative: 7 top 7topPl, /top, 7topiHf

Stopm

Infinitives are almost the same as the Imperative forms.

Primary Forms of the Participles: 7 top and ^ t o p , Stop},

Sts)p£, Step??, S*£?p», Stopft, Steprip. The Participles from

the Piel onwards are formed by taking the primary forms of

the Future, and substituting a ft for the \ Thus, Sto^ be

comes /top/tp. In Pual and Hophal, yopr takes the place of nns.

Thus becomes becomes

83.

The Regular Verb. Model Verb ?l3j5 to slay.

Perfect (Past).

SING.

3rd mas.

3rd fern.

2nd mas.

2nd fern.

1st com.

PLUK.

3rd com.

2nd mas.

2nd fern.

1st com.

KAL {Active).

PfbtDp she slew. T : FIT

thou (m.) hast slain.

J-lbtop thou (f.) hast slain.

^.Fr??Pp I have slain.

^btpfj they have slain.

you (m.) have slain.

]£lbtpp yow (f.) have slain,

w?e 7£#ve #£a£ra.

NIPHAL (Passive).

/tOpJ ê w#s slain.

T : ': •

AtfM (m.) w#s£ slain.]

£A<w (f.) wast slain.

^Pl/ftp? 7 M)fl* slain.

£7 e?/ were *£#*'#.

yow (m.) we/'e

slain. tue zoere

PIEL (Active).

/ tOp 7 e murdered.

nb&p ,?7ie murdered.

thou (m.) A«s£ wiwr-dered.

nb&p dered

murdered.

£7te?/ murdered.

yoto (m.) murdered.

]J3Y?fc3p yow (f.) murdered.

*Dy@p we murdered.

PUAL (Passive).

/£0p he ivas murdered.

nbtSp *7w? «tvw murdered.

nb&p £fow (m.) w;#s£ mwr-dered.

thou (f.) wast murdered

I was murdered.

£7 e?/ were murdered.

?/0W/ (m.) were m«r-dered

]JT?t3|"? yow (f.) were mw-dered.

we were murdered.

SING.

3rd mas.

3rd fern.

2nd mas.

2nd fern.

1st com.

PLUE.

3rd com.

2nd mas.

2nd fern.

1st com.

HIPHIL (Active.)

7^tDpH 7ie caused to slay.

she caused to slay.

thou (m.) hast caused to slay

thou (f.) hast caused to slay

^b&pn i caused to slay.

•ib^tppn they caused to slay.

you (m ) caused to slay.

).Fi?^PU Vou (f«) caused to slay,

we caused to slay.

*

Perfect (Past).

HOPHAL (Passive.)

/QpT\ he was caused to slay.*

nbtppn she was caused to slay.

thou (m.) wast caused to slay.

thou (f.) icast caused to slay.

was caused to slay.

they were Caused to slay.

yon (m.) were caused to slay.

].nbtopn y°u (*-•)were cause^ t° slay,

we were caused to slay.

Or, he caused to be slam.

HITHPAEL.

7£$pflPl he slew himself.

nbt^pri/l she slew herself.

inn thou (m.) hast slain thyself]

thou (f.) hast slain thyselfl

I have slain myself.

they have slain themselves}

•nb&pnn you (m.) have slain yourselves

you (t.) have slain yourselves)

we have slain ourselves.

TABLE OF REGULAR VERB. 83

+3 o

Lp

erfe

s M^

0 » 4

2 4^>

2 PH

0 0

H5

<1 t3

I_4

S

s

3 w P H I—I

£

i 4

CJ

g cc

s s 53 03

*. %. 53 1 53

^s ^ê ^ $ g § & ^ <53 r S

*2> ^

1 *

^ 53

•8 1

r^ , r»o

1 § 53

5- H

§ •§ '£ <5 <S r»o

8 8 53 53 .^s

^ 'I

JKi- *V O . ^

rC^ ^ S 5*S

1 *- • oo &0

O r < V «0

•a .§• -T^ ^

§ S d <D d _«H

CO CO

^ ^j ^g <to <to 53

^ N 5- *•» ^ 53 53 53 53

^ S r«3 ^ ^ S 5^ ?- ^ *. *. •g» § ^ S S S

/ - > 53

d «W i>o w w ^ § 8 r < O ^ ao

€ 5 S *v c; x r - f i : ^

«L ^ ?-'

1 « ^ ^ S . 1 ci /^s ^ 8 «H ivss

V^/ \ _ / r^ i SZ

58 ?3 r < C S3 I S

^ ^ N

lv- Z X l i l i ^

" ^ J i l ^ i* « H « •£ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ s s °=

s> «* ^

Q> ^ Oo

^ ^ K ,

n;. is x> l>r l i i - g-K

& & g:

^ ^ ^

^ < ds < r ^ rs s *

a ti ?S ^3 <^ oo

^ ^ s c;- c x:: f^ m- ^

J^ ^ ^

s a g a «s §

• ^ T ^ 4 J

rt n so (M <M i-H

^ 3 ^ 3 ^ ^ 3 ^ S I 53 53 53 53 53 !

53 S» ^- ?«. ?> , ?- ! ^ 5 3 . ^ 5 3 5 3 5 3 5 J / 5 3 . _ ^ 3 ^ ^ ^ ^ 3 5 3 ^ S 2 ^ :

a" O ° s~, s

^ ^ 5 ^ I ^ ^ § S s "•O -to ?*S 5>S S

fC c; ^ c; p. &.. f i . l i ' HL- o ?

H a. a s- S

n n i ' , *•»' , ^ " | ^ s ^ 1 ^ ^ .•

3 | | I | S "S "S ^ rl ^ « - s s & ^ /—N / - N ^

vE 6 a «H 1 v»_/ V—' r«S 5>s > i _ _ «o

^ ^ g g ^ ^ §s ^ | -•O t o SSi < ^ eS

f.; c; c; c; p; fe, n CL ri In: j r ^ a a: fj*

H E ^ •§ ^ •§ ^ •§ 53 .§ -I l ^ r l ^ ^ ^ ^ * S S , ' i , 8 O v 6 5 ' ? 8 ! l I S a o ' ^

S S S -s ^ — ^ ^ 5 ^ d «H d* O "^

5 ^ S ^ ^ ^ ac 53 53 5S 5S

^ ^ ^ ^ § S o -*o ^ i ?5* ?S

* * f > h *A* *W *^' r > h a . fc Jit l i t W. rf £• £J fl- ^

'ri , . 'rr 1r\>.

xz n S 5 J i r ^ 5 ^ ^ 5 ^ K ^ ^ 3 N O S N O ? 5 N ^ C 3 ^ o t ^ >

^ ^ «0 a© ac JS or, uj,

i S ? C? i

^ S 1 § 53 ^2 so 5^ 5^ §

^ & & & ir

n n

s : 3 a 1 1 a g a ^ a c2 | " ^ ^ 1 1 ^

CO CC CN <N r H

n o 03

^ *

G 2


•J

< P4 W

*& .&

•<s>

rscZ

/

^ < ^ ^

SI <ti «0

n;-<v-1 1 &:

^

•<$ •w

2 S~\

a v- / § c MS

SO

c-c. H i &:

^

o ?*s < r < SO

oo

3 / - N

S c

c; n; r-tf

^

o

self.

5n

5* e =0

N X-l v O i £|:

J*

43 o

u Pi

ft

W o W

W

w

$* o 5s»

s 1

iv- o jr.. & f> r±- i > ^ & Of a g

j n jr- ^r--^

3 *° §

K.. £• £• & v=-~ n - m- nr p £ s a r\ r r *~

~r- ^ ^ J>

« ^ x« r

M ^ £. S S ^rS

5S5

ns §

•£> sti S

ft; n

jr. n .

ft i3

2

A-ft iz

^ 00 <*) I-

a- *)• ft

?S5 •

r

«+H

5»i

H $

£. l±-

^ ft: r

W 5S t>^

C' i :r ^J

ew

8 ofi

C. d -^J:

ft: rr

« f < =0

3

£ £• ^

3-

a a a

1

85. Imperative.

SJNG.

2nd mas.

2nd fern.

PLUK.

2nd mas.

2nd fern.

KAL.

/ D p slay thou >' ' (m.)

*btDp slay thou (f.)

^lb&p slay ye (m.)

nabbn slay ye T : : CD

NIPHAL.

he thou (m.) "'T " sîtt.

> b t ^ n ^ *A<W (f.)

•TPipprT fo ye (m.) slain.

n j b t S p n fo.y* (1) slain.

PIEL. 1

/ D p murder thou

murder thou (f.)

murder ye (m.)

murder ye i T : " " (1)1

HIPHIL.

/ D p / 1 mtt*0 £7WM (m.) " ' : to slay.

cause thou (1) to slay.

cause ye (m.) to slay.

cause ye (f.)

HITHPAEL. ,

7 D p n n slay (m.) thy-\ 1 ' ' *^/.

^btepnn slay (f.) £7^-' : : ' self.\

•Sb^pOn slay (m.) yourselves}

mb&pnn ^ (f). yourselves

86. Infinitive.

Absolute

Construct

KAL.

To slay.

bitsp

bbp

NIPHAL.

To be slain.

bbp?

PIEL.

To murder.

btap

bbp

PUAL.

2b Je murdered.

bbp

HIPHIL.

To cause to slay.

b$pn

b ^ p n

HOPHAL.

To he caused to slay, or to cause

to he slain.

b&pn

HITHPAEL.

If If

§

00

87. Participles.

Mas. sing.

Fem. sing.

Mas. plu.

Fem. plu.

KAL (ACTIVE P A R T . ) .

7tpp slaying.

nbtap or nbftp slaying.

slaying.

KAL (PASSIVE PART. ) .

h ' itOp being slain.

nb-itop

D^ftp

rribôp

?5 ?)

NIPHAL.

/ D p i having been slain.

nbtpp? or nbeps having

having been slain.

rribap? „ „ .,

PIEL.

h&ab murdering.

n7C3i~a or mur-T : >- : v v '- : -,

dering, murdering.

rnbftpE

Mas. sing.

Fem. sing.

Mas. plu.

Fem. plu.

PUAL.

baps

nbtapft

nibtapE

', murdered,

HIPHIL.

AtPpf i causing to

nb>tpps „ „

n*b>tpp£

rriVtppD

55 ?)

HOPHAL.

J ( having been caused\ / tOpt t ^ to slay (or, having

'' T ( caused to be slain).

nbtopp

t^btpptt ,,

nibtopp „

HITHPAEL.

/ tJpJl/Q slaying oneself.

nb^pnp „

D>"b p09 slaying our-, you?'-,

or themselves.

nibtapnp

THE VERB. 87

88. N o t e s on the V e r b forms.

1. Pausal forms {see § 15, 4, p. 13).

Perfect Kal : nS&j?, ft^p, pfccij?, *nSbj5, ^Jpj5, « S B O .

Niphal: rhbp, W?K>j?J, etc.

Piel: nStSlj?, iStep, etc.

Pual : nSbD, etc.

J t e r * Kal: *Sbj#t, 6 b j 2 , ^bj?Pl.

Niphal: •S&iaFl, te)\ TflD&n. r ^ . .. |T . .. | |T. .. |,T.

P i e l : ^ j a l j l , ^ t3 j5 ; , !|7tej31|», etc.

2. To conjugate any other verb, substitute the root-letters

of the verb to be conjugated for the letters StDp. Thus:

Perfect of *\2\ to remember, is IJT, fnDT, JjH3f> filDT, WlST,

npT, Drrpi, |wpl> «15T.

3. Observe in verbs, one of whose letters is lYfi'D'TJ'21, to

apply the rule in § 10, A, 2, p. 8, and write ^3TJ (not ^5W)J

tiSW\ (not ttfigty, TAD! (not Wll?*).

4. Many verbs are used in the Piel and Hiphil conjugations,

and not in the Kal, their meaning, however, being the same as

though they were Kal forms. Thus: ^^H he spoke (Piel), not,

he spoke frequently ;* / H ^ he divided (Hiphil), not, he caused

to divide.

* In the Vocabularies, this use of a verb is represented thus, ll"7! III., h a v.


5. Many verbs prefer the vowel nnp in the Kal Future

instead of the D.Vm. Thus: htt&9 JfibB^ for StflS^, yh$\

6. The Di?in of the Kal Future and of the Active Participle

Kal may be written either defective ;fop\ or, full TlDjT; /tdb

or St?ip.

7. The Hophal forms have sometimes y-iap instead of y®PT

throughout all the tenses. Examples:—}J?ETl £foy were cad

for ttb^n; na^n A* «PAS caused to lie down, for iS^H.

CHAPTER X.

THE VERB—(continued).

89 . How to parse a Verb.

1. Verb, Regular or Irregular. 2. Hoot and translation of

same. 3. Conjugation. 4. Tense. 5. Person. 6. Number.

7. Gender (if in a sentence, name the subject). 8. Explain

any prefixes (as ) Conversive, see p. 92, etc.) and suffixes.

9. Explain any change of vowel from the ordinary form.

10. Translation of the complete word.

Example :—^D v2?Pl : *• Regular Verb; 2. Root Tj^p to reign;

3. Conjugation Hiphil; 4. Perfect Tense; 5. 3rd Person;

6. Plural Number; 7. Common Gender; 10. They have caused

to reign.

THE VERB. 89

EXERCISE 19.

1. Write out the whole of the Niphal of ^ ^ , with the translation of each form.

2. Write out the primary forms of the Perfect of the seven conjugations of

3. Conjugate the Future Kal, Piel and Hiphil of *1^p.

4. Give the Imperative forms of £Dp*?.

5. Write out the Participles and Infinitives Kal, Niphal, Hophal and Hithpael of HpS.

6. Give the forms of the 1st Person Plural Perfect and Future of the seven conjugations of ^fe^p.

7. Conjugate the whole of the Piel of iy\.

8. Give all the forms of the Imperative Masculine Plural of nftS, and all the Feminine Plural forms of the Participles of the same.

89a . Syntax of the Verb (see § 21a, p. 21, and § 35, p. 31). 1. The Verb agrees in gender and number with its subject.* 2. The Verb should stand first. Example:—The men sleio

If the sentence is in the negative, put N7 or 7X or f N first. Example:—And the dove did not find #7) rWH n«Vp- 4- Before the Object (Accusative), put n X t

* Examples of a verb in the singular joined to two nouns or a noun in the plural, occur: such as, f"lHN1 DHD ")2!fll and Miriam and Aaron spake; rri'KP W let there be lights. (The verbs are in the singular).

f Many instances occur, especially in poetical passages, of the omission of HK before Accusatives.


(see rules § 35). 5. Verbs in the Causative sense, in the Piel*

or Hiphil, take two Accusatives. Example:—"HX &0 ^STTin

^STJ shew me, I pray thee, thy way. 6. Nouns having a col

lective sense often take the verb in the plural; such are:

#•«, Dy, irro, *ij35, |*«. Example-.—iinyr^ &x «bK»! awrf owe /waw s Vs to his neighbour. The nouns D\|nfc$ lord,

D^PPX 6)W, DvS?3 m>Q&tM\ take the verb in the singular.

EXERCISE 20.

(On the Perfect of the Regular Verb, and Parsing.)

A. Parse and translate :—

Dciipj59 o. -ns© 4, ^ n s p s 3. -^rp1?? 2. sn5pT i . •12,7-Tncin 9. cr i^pn 8. f^? 7 ^ 7- QJ-nflpn 6.

wÔn io.

B.

>?i nia&ftnn r rmn sinptp? •>? 4. 2-i.os -tnn Drba-nî 3. aj-nsi 'n ms n$$ nt*;n?n n ^ - r i ^ i 5. rye -v^P? bb JJTJQD V}?P3 6. B ^ W -nsaJ 'n rr*33 n$y n^njin wnn Di*a >ni« n??i?n ngn* n« ^ 3 * 7. *p? ^9$? Jjftbgon "">$« 9. ornagp D T 3 «-n b^nar; ^3 .YT aJn 8. s^nn cr'ajn nrnps 10. W E E ? n-jn stfnn ^®n b$ >btf

* For Piel in a causative sense, S££ § 94 end of 1.

f rn3 £0 c%£, n i ^ £0 rest, merge the radical H into the H of the pronominal suffix. Thus: rra^ ft-on, *n?^n, for nrn|9 nrnan ^napri,

THE VERB. 91

C.

1. Our fathers have not kept the law of God which was written by the hand of Moses. 2. My way is hidden from the Lord. 3. I was forgotten like a dead man from [the]* heart, 4. For I have been stolen (Pual) from my land, and also here I have been kept as a slave. 5. Why did you not sanctify me in the eyes of the people ? 6. We have heard all that our fathers have related unto us. 7. Who sought this (fern.) from your hand ? 8. You have destroyed the inheritance of the Lord. 9. You have caused many to stumble in the law. 10. Why will you loose this people from its works? 11. They have concealed themselves from their own flesh and have not remembered the holy commands of their father. 12. I have separated you from the midst of your brethren for my servants.

89b. The Adverbs TX then, D'lft before, are used frequently

with verbs in the Future, to represent the idea of the Perfect

tense. Thus: D^ft y&\ TK then Moses sang; T\1&& Slip! TX

then Solomon caused to assemble; ^5 1? «^/5^ 0*!$? *?&$ before

I had left off speaking.

EXERCISE 21.

(On the Future of the Verb, and Parsing.)

A. Parse and translate:—

•isapo1! 5. Wjprv) 4. • rg-isttfn 3. ^V$n 2. ^0?111. .^DMJ-I 10. D aJyi 9. to1?^ 8. •W'pti 7. ririp'rv] 6.

* Words in square brackets are not to be rendered in the Hebrew.


sbi anb n$ 2. D iarr Tjinp "gris nnstp-ritf y ^ y 1. n>?tt?> 4. jiy -IM} nsT5 75b 3. wi??^ rtbi nnb D^?N -nsT. E^K 6. «^?an - m ntws spsj . sb1] -n?^ wb 5. nrap-i nnj iba;? 'n *»? xrpri ^ ^Stffl EN 7. o?Otf tab^S ^TT!? •n&, D^P? 1 ?! .insr t^b^b 8. b#?n riV) Tn"P ^ p 'n pQsno n w bpn 10. T»yn-b|-ny nîoqs n^ntpnq 9. 7nb yttfin? -IST ry 12. ^rtbg "nv iyn-1 sna? 1521 p-fliTO 11.

C. 1. The lips of the wicked will speak evil. 2. For the lips of the priest shall keep knowledge, and law shall they seek from his mouth. 3. Your eyes will be opened. 4. A man shall not be cut off from thee from off the throne of Israel. 5. Thou shalt be buried in a good old age. 6. I will open to you the windows of heaven. 7. And I will write upon the tablets that which I wrote upon the first tablets, which thou hast broken to pieces. 8. Ye shall not mention other gods. 9. I will not destroy this city for the sake of the twenty righteous men who are in it. 10. The snow will hide itself upon them. 11. Before they lay down, the wicked men gathered themselves against them.

90. ) Vav Conversive (or Consecutive*). One of the most frequent forms of the verb is that used

with the ) called Vav Conversive or Vav Consecutive.

This ) (meaning and) is placed :—

A. Before a form in the Perfect, and converts the meaning into that of the Future;

B. Before a form in the Future, and converts the meaning into that of a Perfect.

* So called, because it is mostly used in a consecutive narrative.

THE VEUB. 93

A. ) Conversive with the Perfect.—This is punctuated with a

K)f. Examples:—7L?P he slew, 7bp1 anc^ he w^ âV ( n° t and

he slew).

Notes.—(1) In front of the letters ft'fi'Vl the ) assumes

the form of 1 (see § 31, 3, p. 29), &fi& he sought, fc^MI

and he will seek.

(2) If the Perfect form is required to be retained with a 1,

the subject to the verb must be placed first. Thus:

yfcW 7H1 and David heard, but T H JflbKh means, and

David will hear.

JB. ) Conversive with the Future.—This is punctuated with

a ring and is followed by a strong Dogesh in the next letter.

Examples:—vbp* he will slay, 7bp*1 anc^ he slew.

Notes,—(1) When X is the first letter, since the X does not take a Dogesh (see § 15,1, p. 13), the ) Conversive is punctuated with a fDj?. Example :—7bpX1 and

I

(2) If a * with a w\w follows the ) Conversive, the Dogesh is omitted (see § 10, B. 4, p. 8). Example :—73T1 and he spake.

(3) When the 1 has a fcOS? in front of a Future form, it is

not ) Conversive, and the meaning is not changed.

Sbp*. he will slap, /fop) and he will slap.

(4) Observe that /Dpi, Perfect with 1 Conversive, and 7bp*1, Future with 1 non-Conversive. both mean and he will slap.

STUDENTS HEBREW GRAMMAR.

(5) In front of X (in the Piel and Pual), the ) non-Conversive takes the vowel nns (see § 31, 2, p. 29).

St3(5M. (with1) non-Oonversive) becomes ^J3K1; with

) Conversive it becomes

(6) In front of * (in Piel and Pual), the ) non-Conver-sive takes a P"vn ( w § 15, 3, p. 13).. and the K)f under the * is dropped. Thus:

(7) WithxSor^N not, the ) is attached to the Particle.

Example :—And he did not speak *)jT\ it/).

(8) With ) Conversive, the shorter Hiphil form is in

variably used. Thus:

(9) In parsing a form with ) prefixed, state the effect

of the ) upon the meaning. Thus: (a) /bp*1), verb

regular; root ^bD to slay, Kal Future 3rd person,

singular, masculine, with ) Conversive changing the

meaning to the Perfect, and he slew. (b) /fop)

. . . . with ) non-conversive. (r) /faO) . . . . Perfect

. . . . with ) Conversive, changing the meaning into

the Future.

EXERCISE 22.

Translate and parse :—

IQD^_ 5. nj'rb1?^ 4- rntfp:n: 3. b^SWl 2. JnEpn 1.

wfprrn 10. ^nbcn: 9. TfbtjJMj 8. n ^ w i 7. sefein 6.

.TJ!??^! 15. V73N514. ijrrnp-i 13. ^95112. oj-iafew 11.

THE VERB. 95

B.

1. And we shall learn.0* 2. And she will not learn. 3. And the kings destroyed the great city. 4. And they rose up early. 5. And I will remember.0 6. And I will seek.0

C. nin? nbtjfa 2. Q^jn n.57 -1903 so??5 ~mn trprro 1. -i#8 D^n^n-ns ninbn-bs sftptfl 3. vw nîp nato-by Drrns-ritf inn^-ns n nbtf -ib?»i 4. i ^ t p -itjfcj ninbn-by n-jQn riEnip în-b^ ins ?rbtpm: 5. sps;-n^| pn!rrntf npisin sifcvptp;y7. Tf nn 3.1 -li^n ^3 trnbs b ^ i 6. -wan bip-nw nrnbtf E£eJ*i 8. cibtp ny j vbM n3Tl «ft^n *ps<7 T^ n s ^ b rrih^n npn^n ^3 nnb?3rn 9. nnQ^n bsn^ ^3 -^3pon >? D\ntpb?) ê?J?i 10. ^n&b win c*biMn b^ njssn.î 12. ift rnpft inis ij-nprn 11. 23$? on?P VlS"b?-b? D^TP? nfe^s Tp?»i 13. n\cr->?^ vtpnpb byn^-ny rrip»i nîaa ?ttfirn D3tp'*5 u . synrr vjtp on^nia^ Drpp.3 DT >p; DI ^?p- _ 15. nn-in tontp Tpb^

.JPJ3 "S§sb -inST "UPS

D. 1. And they sold Joseph to the Ishmaelites for twenty

[pieces of]t silver. 2. And the chief of the butlers told his dream to Joseph. 3. And there with us [was]t a Hebrew^ lad, a servant to the chief of the executioners, and we told (it) to him, and he interpreted to us our dreams,

* Phrases marked ° are to be rendered by the Perfect with ) conversive, and the Future with 1 non-conversive.

t See note on p. 91.


each ( = a man) according to his dream he interpreted. 4. And all the elders of Israel gathered themselves together, and they spake in the ears of the king. 5. And he was buried with his fathers in the city of David. 6. And the children of Israel pursued after Midian, and they destroyed all their army. 7. And thou shalt separate the Levites from the midst of the children of Israel. 8. And David sought the presence of the Lord. 9. And I remembered my covenant with your fathers. 10. And God spake all these words. 11. And his son reigned in his stead sixteen years. 12. And Jacob sent messengers before him unto Esau his brother to the land of Seir. 13. And thou wert cast upon the face of the field, and thou wert bound with bands of iron. 14. And all that plenty will be forgotten from before that great famine.

91. The Jussive and Cohortative Forms of the Future.

To make up for the lack of tenses and moods, so noticeable

in Hebrew, the Future has two sub-moods, called —

A. The Jussive.

B. The Cohortative or Voluntative.

A. The Jussive:—

Affirmative.—When a form of the 2nd or 3rd persons ex

presses a command or wish, it is said to be in the Jussive mood.

Example;—/fop* usually means he will slay, but it may also

be rendered let him slay, may he slay, or he shall slay, or he must

THE VERB. 97

slay. In each of these meanings is said to be the Jussive

mood of the Future. The Jussive is thus also the 3rd person

form of the Imperative.

In the Regular Verb, no change is made in the Jussive

forms to distinguish them from the ordinary forms, except in

the Hiphil. The forms of the Hiphil that are in the Jussive

mood prefer the vowel n¥ to the vowel Y)7i iTVn. Examples :

7*£P|T he will cause to slay, ^tpp*, Jussive, let him cause to slay.

As the Jussive is a kind of Imperative, this explains why

the Imperative Hiphil form is derived from 7£?pP) and not

from h'topft (see § 82, p. 80).

Negative.—When the Jussive forms are to be used nega

tively, denoting a- prohibition, the particle "7X is employed

(see § 61, p. 60) Thus: J^fDlrSx do not be angry, ^ ? £ J T S K

let him not cast.

These constructions with "7N form the negative of the

Imperative. Thus: Sbp slay thou slay not! do

not slay !

Note.—ih is also sometimes used with the Future to express

emphatic prohibitions, as in the Decalogue, DJJJ7) K7 thou

shalt not steal.

B. Cohortative or Voluntative.—This sub-mood expresses a

wish or desire to do something, and is indicated by T\— being

H


added to the 1st Person only of the Future. This PI is called the Cohortative or Voluntative PI . Examples :—

( from *)hp$ is formed PH/b^K I m*h to keep, let me Kal \ „ -\hm „ n iaeo M ns keep. keep'

1 „ yS&tii „ Pl^S^N letme keep diligently. Piel I "' T : " -:

' J „ I S ^ J „ n n a ^ J let us keep diligently.

( „ ^JDpJ „ N ^ & M ?et ns cause to slay.

let me slay myself. e „ /tS^PIJ „ Pl^tSpnJ fct us slay ourselves.

Pausal forms : H ^ X , r n f i ^ K , nS&pPW, etc.

Note.—The Cohortative Pi is rarely attached to Passive forms. A few examples exist, as Niphal : PUpMNl and let me be avenged; PIPDWI and let us reason together.

EXERCISE 23.

Translate and parse each verb :—

•nb tangJ-ns sinnpn-b« 2. n ^ s ^.3? ttf^ t^V-bs 1. -ibatei "7>pn *pni$» •*? ib?n-bK ^vw$ 3. bsnt^ ^2 ijinn n\^$n:N-ntf n;ro#?i 5. ^pan-b^ TJ^ rhtpn-bn 4. n n q « 5 njst&j 7. *Trbq^: *\®V nntpn-"?$ 'rr-btf bbsqan 6. nnbtp nits aybs-Ds 9. rhrs "'bn'sn jstpErbsn. 8. D^ Tjpp nn^ty ^^niw^rb? rnspy 10. -wbtf âg?! •TmN-bp nneys? 12. ^ ^ i ? P ^ P -inon-bw VTW pbw 13 n . ntppb^ 13. Q^pbp 155 Tjî-Tvp rn^ntfi Tpn ^ n ^ n 'n n>5 ??£b 15. 'n \?sib D5 i« ntps&s} 14. D^ba^ri

• Tjb nits nt$?2N: wnfrtf

THE VERB. 99

B. Translate:— 1. Do ye not shed blood and do not stretch forth a

hand against him. 2. May the Lord judge between me and thee! 3. I-wish-to-keep a bridle to my mouth. 4. Let him speak to us and we will hear. 5. Let him not destroy his people in his fierce anger ( = in the fierceness of his anger). 6. Hide not your faces from us, for we are in great sorrow. 7. And do not make great thy mouth in the day of sorrow. 8. My son, do not forget my teaching. 9. And now let us make a covenant, I and thou. 10. May the Lord cause bread to rain from the heavens for us and for our little ones. 11. Do (sing.) not withhold chastisement from the lad. 12. And the land shall not be sold for ever, for the land is mine. 13. Let me speak this time in the ears of my lord, as ( = and) I-wish-to-make mention of his kindness to me heretofore. 14. Do ye not trust in princes, in the son of man, to whom there is no salvation. 15. May the Lord keep thee from all evil, and may He send upon thy head many blessings from heaven IG. Let me pour out my song before thee, and let men sing praises to Th}T Holy Name.

92. Notes on the Imperative, Infinitive and Participle.

A. Imperative.—1. The Jussive forms of the Future serve

as the 3rd person Imperative; and with 7 $ , as the negative

forms of the Imperative (see § 91, A. p. 97).

2. When the Kal Future has the vowel nna (as 7NBfrl for

the Imperative also has nnB. Thus : H 2


3. The 2nd Person Mas. Sing, sometimes take a Pi, (similar

to the Cohortative H of the Future). Thus: P!l?2?£> (for y££>);

n ^ W n (for ^ P l ) ; n W P l (for W P 1 ) ; pnDT (for *\b]).

B. Infinitives.—1. The Infinitive Absolute is joined to a finite

form of the Verb to express emphasis. Thus: )*)ti$F\ ^bfc^

ye shall carefully keep; TppFl T?£?H wilt thou indeed reign ?

I t is also occasionally used as an Imperative, DV"DN "TD?

rQE^Pl remember the Sabbath day. I t sometimes expresses the

verbal idea, without reference to time or subject. Thus:

|X¥ fchBh ^j53 Jhn slaying oxen and killing sheep; iMK \\T\)\

D^Xfi p .^ /3 W and he set hhn over al1 the Iand °f E0UPf-

2. The Infinitive Construct takes one of the letters DVD'i

as a prefix; with A D ' 3 , the vowel is SJ^, thus: ÎpftPlS. In

the Kal, as the form of the Inh'nitive Construct begins with a

K} , / b p , the b'yZ have the vowel fbij p'vn, thus : S b M

(and not / b M ) . The £5 has always ;bij P"i;n followed by

Strong Dogesh ^bjpD. Before the letter PI, t2 becomes D,

thus:

3. The Infinitive Construct takes the pronominal suffixes,

like a Noun. Thus: Kal, 7bpfo-$fay, ,k?tDD my slaying, "f^bp,

TjStpp, i^ j? , nStop, «!?lpj5, D^lpj?, D i j 5 ; Niphal, V&jTt,

THE VERB. 101

Examples of Infinitive Construct with translation: v^?f?3 ?y/

my slaying, or when I slay, or when I slew; *?[3?^1 ™l ^Hl hl'ny~ down, or when thou liest clown.

G. Participle*—1. Participles agree in Gender and Number with their subject, thus : Women learning

2 Participles are used as Nouns: Dfiifc one who is Judging a judge; 1ty\& a keeper. The Participle therefore may be declined like a Noun, ^2)W, ^t?Si^, etc. (see § 50, Class III.. p. 45).

3. The Personal Pronouns are used with Participles to

denote the Present Tense (see § 93, p. 103): SjDp ^ (m.), or

PlSaijp *J{* (f.) / am slaying, I slay, St?p HPlX thou slayest,

rhtip m, hbb wn, rhsb SAPI, nhtsb «m«, nibbD wi3«, D^3j5 DflK, ni73j5 |nx, D*7&ft DPI, ni7fi?p {Pi.

4. The Definite Article with Participles is used with the meaning of "IfcJ tf. Example:—Ip^n he who ccqrtureth. The same sense is conveyed, especially in proverbs, with the T\ omitted, as jiX^ $ M * ITltD i n j ^ ^0 £ /^ diligently seeketh good seeketh favour.

5. The Particle T\^T\ behold! gives the Participle the sense of a Future tense. Thus: Ttpftft *}3f! behold I will cause to rain.

* In some Grammars, especially those based upon the ^"Qy |1K^ Ti»*?n by Judah Ben Zeb, (Breslau, 1796), the Piel and Hiphil have Active and Passive Participles: Piel ^BDE a n d t a p D ; Hiphil ^BpB and ^ttpE; whilst the Pual Participle is 7t$p; the Hophal ?Dpn. The very rare cases in which these Pual and Hophal forms, without the D, occur and the similarity of their meaning with the Passive Participles of the Piel and Hiphil, have resulted in the arrangement adopted in this book becoming almost universal in modern Grammars.


EXERCISE 24

A.

-ibTfl "Ti J 8. ^.5^n 7. n^>£tpn 6. -VTM 5. *[tp?3-nfc$. /tpgs rnsttf 11. tabtpw tsbtp 10. i^p t^ 9.

B. ]trw btf n i s i niiyj V3i?rw irni. Tfban -lyi 2£t#n$ 1. •obsn 3. fab*?? n&3$ nair rn.tpy arntp 73 2. nnân 7^n w$2y\ 4. oyn n^j b? by s^nn ci»5 3? J-iptf tfPO Tjoj^-bsn I?1? ?? 'nJ?y n ^? 5. a^rrn-bs-ntf Tppnb rn tp'pn ^nib 321 7. sps; \35 TOiptpi. PPTH 6. )^^n-bw 'n n$ npspn "ip*. ri$ nptpn-bs nbx s. *j3b b? on"« -lWpn ini? 10. âi^. ID T Diwa DISH DT TfDitt? 9. "isniasi T \ ^ :

nwby liv nzn 11. nb nprj a iT"? *H!^ °nb sap? inDi« ti?9?n nnn5?1 n?3P win 'rrns 12. onsb nî^v D pb?p Dâ via?! Dap> nn'w ^ > n i 13. n^p nn, p sinn .liss \3? 7 ^ bsn^ >3.a 7 5 ai»n tag&n 'n ufety u .

C.

1. Behold I will cause all joy to cease from your midst. 2. Hearken unto me, ye who pursue ( = pursuers of) righteousness, who seek ( = seekers of) the Lord. 3. He who teaches my hand for the battle. 4. For it (fern.) you are seeking from before me. 5. Why do you not * keep my ways and observe the command of my mouth. 6. Folly is bound up (Part.) in the heart of a lad. 7. He who keepeth his mouth and his tongue, keepethf his soul

* D3J*«, see § 61, B. 3, p. 61. f Use the Future.

THE VERB. 103

from troubles. 8. For if he will surely cry unto me, (and) I will hearken, for I am gracious. 9. When we remember Zion, the city of our glory. 10. When they spoke unto me, (and) 1 wrote all their words in the scroll. 11. He shall surely pay, and, if he has nothing, then he shall be sold for his theft. 12. Cast ye him into this pit which is in the wilderness. 13. Pursue after your enemies and destroy them. 14. Sell thou (fern.) the oil, and pay thy creditors. 15. Sanctify yourselves and attend to the word of my mouth when I speak unto you.

93. The Present Tense. There is no special form to denote the Present Tense. We

may therefore use :—

A. The Present Participle Active.

B. The* Infinitive Construct.

C. The Future.

A. The Present Participle Active {see § 92, C. 3).

B. Infinitive Construct, when used with a word like when,

or as {see § 92, B. 2, 3); *y&#3 when I hear.

C. Future. When expressing the idea of continued action,

of habit. Thus : 2N PIBB^ M i l |5 a mse son gladdens a father.

94. Notes on the Conjugations. 1. - Intransitive Verbs: Kal and Piel.—There is a class of

Intransitive Verbs that prefer the vowel nv in the 3rd person

Perfect, as 1%$ 1° oe heavy; Y§t\ to be pleased. In the


Participle Active, their forms are 152, TSH (instead of 122

YSh). Future: 12^\t fSHV A few verbs have D in, as JbD

to be small. Participle Jbp. Future JtOpV

The Intransitive Verbs, like to be great, pTH to be strong,

£JHD to be holy, are rendered in Piel and Hiphil alike. Thus:

yli and D ^ i l mean he made great, he magnified; &lp and

B^pPl he made holy, he sanctified. This gives the Piel a

Causative sense.

2 Niphal. There are two verbs, similar to the Latin

Deponent Verbs, that are Passive (Niphal) in form, but Active

in meaning. These are $2$) he swore, J?5 '*5 anc^ ?<e swore

[but, Hiphil Tiy3£JVl I caused to swear ]; and DnSj he fought,

) and he fought. •

3. Sentences with an oath. Note the construction of the

Negative after the verb to swear, or an expression of an oath :

. . . . DX . . . . ^ i ? 3 ^ J / have sworn . . . . that I will not;

H O ^ *VTfl$ fi^Pfl Sit 'Tl2 *h r\V2Wn Swear to me by the

Lord that thou wilt not cut off my seed after me; *')% $\ DN 'P! *Fl

As the Lord liceth, if there is not a nation.

4. Hithpael. This conjugation has sometimes the meaning

of the simple Passive, like the Niphal. Thus : DPtfnnS (Gen.

xxxvii. 35) to be comforted.

Transposition of letters, a. If the first radical is either fc?, £?,

or D (one of the Sibilants, see § 4, p. 3), this letter changes place

with the J1 of the Hithpael, which then takes a Weak Dogesh

THE VERB. 1 0 5

(according to Rule in § 10, A. 2). Examples:—^££)E>PI (not

l ?£T)n) he kept himself; 1 3 ^ , 1 (not ISWlTl) he hired himself;

Ififipn (n ( ) t ^ P n n ) he hid himself.

b. If the first radical is )£, the same transposition takes

place, but the H of the Hithpael becomes £3. Example:—

Hithpael of pn_¥; pT[&5U we shall justify ourselves (not p^VPJ

nor p^PlW).

r. If the first radical is either H, t3, J, or H, the T\ of the

Hithpael is occasionally dropped, or assimilated, and the next

letter takes a Strong Dogesh. Examples :—"lS^fi f° r ^ 5 * ^ 5

speaking by himself; "ntjfi for ^nDJlp purifying himself:

5|N33n for S|N3inn prophesy ye; DSFlft for D^finA Mow «/**«

wwfo? thyself perfect.

EXERCISE 25.


n^yatpan 5. 'qsritpna 4. PTOSS 3. ba^n 2. nr i^npp l.

.•iBnb?i 10. ^ B E I 9. ODV^- 8. ^tftfPP 7. ^ P p 6.

B. 1. Write out the Participle Hithpael of IDE* with the

Personal Pronouns, and the translation of each form. 2. Conjugate the verb i n p throughout the Hithpael.

3. Write out the 3rd person Feminine Plural Future with the ) conversive, of plX in Niphal, Piel, and Hithpael.

4. Give the Participle Active forms, witli the pronouns she and you (mas.) of the verb M?2p.


95. Rarer Conjugations.

In addition to the seven conjugations, there are a few more that are rarely used. Of these, the chief are:—

1. vVk Po-el (a form of the Piel), as ÎllD, which serves

as the Piel of the verb ISO.

2. ?1?3 Po-al (a form of the Pual), as i i i D , which serves

as the Passive of ttb.

3. hhvB Pilel, as pKB> to be at rest; pSH 1o be green.

Pilpel, as 2 to support; f|¥£¥ to chirp.

Pe-al-al, as irHfiD to run round quickly.

6. 7^%r\T) Hithpalpel, as npnOfin to tarry.

CHAPTER XI.


96. The Verb with Suffixes of the Accusative Pronoun.*

The Accusative form of the Personal Pronoun may be

added to the Verb, (1) by forms of HX (see § 57, 1, p. 57), as

he will slay me; or (2) by combining with the Verb

a pronominal suffix, as he will slay me. The vowel

nv under the 7, in the second example, that joins the verb to

the suffix, is called the binding or connecting vowel.

* Called for shortness, Accusative suffixes.

THE VERB. 107

me.

thee.

him.

her.

PLURAL.

)}— or )y- us.

P Q— or D—

I T or {TT

you.

them.

97. Table of Accusative Sufl&xes to Verbs.

Compare the Suffixes to Nouns, § 38, p. 34.

SINGULAR.

1st pers. Common ^— or *J-

2nd pers. Masculine TJ

2nd pers. Feminine *TJ

3rd pers Masculine )?] (ori)

3rd pers. Feminine fl (or H—)

98 . Perfect Kal:—

3rd Mas. S i n g : — / t ^ p he slew, ^?tpp he slew me, ^ D p he

slew thee, \?fop he slew thee (f.), 1/tpp or ^Pl/Dp /^ sfew AMTC,

H/lpp Ae s t o Aer, w t p p /^ s ^ 1 ws, DD/tSp ê sêw t/ou> E/tpp

A6 s/ew W#m.

3rd Fern. Sing.:— H 7 P p she slew, ^ r n t p p she slew me,

*\t)bt?p> ^ P i ? ' ^ r f e j ? ' or vfc&j?, nriSaj?, unS&jp, DH/Dp. Observe the change of?] into Jl.

2nd Mas. Sing.:— Wow Affs£ s t e ,

P l ^ b p , ^n'pDjp, DTI76J3.

2nd Fem. Sing.:—

1st Pers. Sing.:—

or vrn'pBj?, rrn'pBj?. 05^?&j?> tffl'p&j?-3rd Com. Plur.:— T?®$ they have slain, ^ S D D , flVDj?,

v i te) , ntaap, etc.


2nd Mas. and Fern. Plur.:— you have

slain, •MflS&p, ^ r iS lDp, nvfr&p, etc.

1st Com. P l u r . : — 1 J / D p we have slain, ^jSfcf?, ^ ? £ p , etc.

9 9 . The Perfects of the other Conjugations take suffixes in exactly the same manner as the Kal. The Passive Conjugations naturally have no suffixes, nor has the Hithpael. The Piel alone varies from the Kal in its 3rd person sing, mas., form, which is as follows: — 6i?p], ^ B p , ^tpp, f?£3p, fa$p, rbbp, uStep, crtep, thqp.

The other forms of the Fiel are (on the model of the Kal): —

[rb^p], *xb$p, i\T)b&p, etc. Thus, Hiphil:—6*Bpn], O ^ b p H , ^ t p p n , etc ; pW?B|Tl],

100. Future with Accusative suffixes. Kal—

3rd Mas. Sing. 7bp* he ail I slay.

he will slay me.

^/JpjT he wiM slay thee.

T 7Lpp1 he will slay thee.

• he trill slay him.

he will slay her.

he will slay us.

DD^tpp* he will slay you.

he will slay them.

With the Demonstrative 1

^ j ? *

i?w

^w ^W-^w.

THE VERB. 109

vbpPl she will slay, 7bpF) thou (mas.) wilt slat/, v^pF) thou

(fern.), and 7bpX, are inflected in the same way.

bbp\ has the following forms :—rwStpp*, ^ P | T . » ^ S t S j y ,

rrbtow, wiStap, D3ta?p\ Q^t?p\

t>topft is like 5|Stpp ; PoSbpPl takes no suffixes.

In the Pie?, Stt|T becomes ^ ^ , ^ ^ 1 5 % ^W-.' ^W--'

" Tf>/«y, ^Vt?p!, ^ P | 7 _ , etc.

101. A. Nun Demonstrative.

B. iW/£ Paragogic.

A. The iVwM Demonstrative (also called Aim Energetic or

iVim Epenthetic, i. e. added in the middle of a word) is a J

placed before the accusative pronominal suffixes of the Future

forms. Example:—^yiSlD'! he w^ honour me (Psalm 1. 23),

being a fuller form of ^ 7 3 5 / Usually, this J- is assimilated

in the suffix, and a Strong Dogesh represents its omission.

Examples : — ^3 /A\?\ becomes ^ E J p * ; ^p/ipp* . becomes

Tptpp^; înj/top^ becomes ^/f tp^ (in this instance, the H drops,

but the 3 receives a Dogesh); becomes

V&pp\ becomes wSlpjT.

The J Demonstrative is only used in pausal forms, and

before the suffixes me, thee (m.), him, her, and us.


B. The JS'un Paragogic is occasionally placed at the end of

forms of the 2nd and 3rd person in the Future, ending in *l—

or }, without affecting the meaning in any way. Thus *p2nJ?l

becomes J^pSlPl; becomes becomes

W&E'n. The forms mostly occur at the end of a sentence,

such as is marked by an NFirong or a p-i p.

102. I m p e r a t i v e w i t h Suffixes.

Kal:—bbp, "jStOp slay me, vh$$ slay him, rhpfi or PI^j?,

'hpfi, 'yh&p ây me, wStpj?, H ^ p , etc.

hpp, s?h$p, etc.

Piel:—Stpj5, ^ p , inStejp, etc.

Hiphih—Stejpn, ^êpn, vi^&jpn, etc.

103. I n f i n i t i v e C o n s t r u c t w i t h Suffixes.

The Infinitive Construct is inflected like a noun (see also § 92, B. 2, p 100).

I t further takes the Accusative pronominal suffixes.

Kal :—oSpp to slay me, "^Lpf?, ^ ip j? , fapj5, nStpp, ttS^p,

DD^tpp, D^tpp.

P i e l : — ^ p , ^ p , etc.

Hiphil :—^^tppn , ^&j?PI , etc.

Observe the distinction in meaning between v£5p7 t° m1l slaying ( = when I slay), and 'Optpp? to slay me.

THE VERB. I l l

104. Part ic ip les w i t h Suffixes. (See § 92, p. 101).

When the Participle is used as a Verb, the form of the

1st pers. sing, suffix is ^ Examples:—*J?tpip slaying me,

When the Participle is used as a Noun, the ordinary Pro

nominal Suffixes are employed (see ib., C. 2).

EXERCISE 26. A.

1. Write out the whole of the Future Hiphil of 2*0 with the Accusative suffixes, giving the translation of each form.

2. Write out the Perfect Piel of D53 with the Accusative suffixes.

3. Give the Imperatives Kal and Hiphil of ^Dt with the Accusative suffixes, translating each form.

B. Parse and translate :—

ppîn 5. ^bppi 4. -vriDtp 3. DJjneefa 2. ^n^tT. I. ••ornij1! 10. "^ttrft 9. nn^yrji s. onbtp^ 7. TH?^1 6-•lanjpai 14. nangp*? 13. -vitfbtt} 12. vtoj^snn n .

.0?T}? 15. C. Translate (attaching the pronoun to the verb):—

1. You (m.) have sent me. 2. Cause me to tread. 3. And bring us near to thy service. 4. Hide them in the shadow of thy wings. 5. And thou wilt remember me. 6. Teach me (Piel) thy statutes. 7. He will gather them. 8. They have stoned me. 9. He will bring him


near. 10. To sanctify me in the eyes of the people. 11. Thy hand has supported me. 12. I have caused thee to ride. 13. And Asa pursued them. 14. 1 have indeed (infin. abs.) hired thee. 15. Do not bury me in Egypt. 16. And let us cast him into the pit. 17 When thou pourest out thy wrath. 18. He will weigh me in the scales of righteousness. 19. Fire has burnt them. 20. From my hand thou shalt seek him. 21. And in great mercies I will gather thee ( / ) . 22. M&y the Lord keep her from all trouble and sorrow. 23. Seek {in. sing.) peace and pursue it 24. And I seized hold of the two tables, and I threw them from my two hands, and I broke them in pieces before ( = to) your eyes.

CHAPTER XXL


105. Guttural Verbs .

Guttural Verbs are verbs in which one of the radicals is a guttural letter OYy'H'n'N). Certain changes take place in the vowels of these verb forms, because a guttural cannot take a Dogesh, and usually does not have a sjsr, especially a sounding K}£> (see rules, § 9 and § 15, 1). (1) The vowel in front of the letter that, in the regular verb, takes a Dogesh is lengthened. Thus: Tl!T anc* ^5V!S i n s tead °f T!P* and H5W (2) Instead of the sir, a compound KJK> is used. Thus: DmOy instead of Drn&tf. When the vowel following the compound $\& is turned into NJK', the compound xil>;

becomes a full vowel. Thus: Hftyft instead ot iH&tffi.

GUTTURAL VERBS. lleS

106 . The Gutturals consist of three classes ;—

A. Verbs with the First Radical a Guttural (5 Guttural),

as 1*2$ 't° serve> p!H to be strong.

B. Verbs with the Second Radical a Guttural (called Medial Gutturals, or )} Gutturals), as 7M3 to redeem, DP!K> to kill.

C. Verbs with the Third Radical a Guttural (called 7 Gutturals), as to send, J pE? to hear.

107. The names fl Guttural, y Guttural, 7 Guttural, are derived from the following :—

The earlier Jewish Grammarians took as their model the verb 7p3 to ivork, (see upon the Names of the Conjugations, § 82, 4, p. 80). Hence they called every First Radical a S, every Second Radical a JJ, every T/M/tf Radical b. Thus :

would be described as having a p for its 3 (/.& for its First Radical, a tO for its JJ) i.e. for its Second Radical), a ^ for its 7 (&>. for its Third Radical), Similarly, when we say a Verb is an y Gutttiral Verb, we mean its JJ (/.£« its Second Radical) is a Guttural.

Irregular Verbs are also named after the same plan. Thus a Verb like EPJ3 is said to be a 3'£ Verb, i.e. its 5 (or First Radical) is a i ; PI/3 is a H 7 Verb, its 7 (or Third Radical)

a PI. 1

114 STUDENTS HEBREW GRAMMAR.

108. A. Verbs with the First Radical a Guttural (£ Guttural),

& 0- "OV to serve*

The Piel, Pual, and Hithpael have no variations.

Perfect: — KAL.

11V

tcri-pl?

Future:— KAL.

""OS? l i i l ?^ nhy:n

'HWri i h ^ s

=n?v; nj-pyri

v o s r i n j i h ^ n

"Thsw

1 NIPHAL.

"Tnsr3 n 7?? ,? ^755,3

IH^S,?

"•J-H3S,? •nnâ

QJ-H3S3 ••0135,3

NIPHAL.

"D?!! T^yo ^3?tf

^3?& *T31?N

•^3?-rg-rsyj-i

• ?s rq 'pyci

13^3

HIPHIL. T33?i7

nn^n^rT

J-H3SJ7 J-n33?n

^n insn -i^3S n

DJ^13?n ^13J?n

HIPHIL.

*P32,! ("OS?) T3Sp 0 3 ? P ) T3S n ("T3Sfi)

^T3SP T3?« | ^ 3 5 , ^

n ? 1 3 ? ^ nT3S,^ ;

n j r p s p ! T3S.3

1 HOPHAL.

T3W n-jnyn m 3 ^ n j-nnjrj

\FH3^n ^ 3 ? n

aj-n3??n jo-psn

HOPHAL.

^ = *0?fl" ^3?tf

^3?t f 13??W •^3y,;

np735?î •ii3y^

nj^nyn T?J?3

* The hints given in § 82 should be applied in the learning of all verbs. I n the following Tables, where a complete set of forms is not given, it is understood that the omitted forms are exactly like the ordinary Regular Verb. Always compare the verb forms that vary with those of the Regular Verb. See Comparative Table of Verbs, § 140, p. 167.

f The Fern, form of the 2nd Plural Perfect, when omitted, can be obtained from the Mas. form by changing the D into a }.

GUTTURAL VERBS. 1 1 5

Imperative :—

HIPHIL.

Infinitive: —

KAL.

A b s . "T^y

Const . " T i ^

NIPHAL.

T O ? : }

*0?n

HIPHIL.

"T :»n

T3Sn

HOPHAL.

-rnsn •• T : IT

Participle:—

KAL.

Ac t . T #

Pass.T^y,nTins

NIPHAL. HIPHIL. HOPHAL.

109. Notes:—(1) Verbs commencing with M share the peculiarities of

the Guttural Verbs ; in the case of six verbs, however, they are

yet more irregular, and are treated under the head of N"Q Irregular

Verbs, see § 120, p. 132.

(2) Verbs commencing with a ") only deviate from the Regular

Verb when a Dogesh is required in the first radical, as in parts of

the Niphal. Thus : Kal 0 # ? T ] , rfr?. ; Niphal, ^ D , be thou

silent.

(3) Many Verbs have ?WD in all the forms of the Kal Future, as

P?C!P'(as well as in the 1st Pers. Sing. "Q^S). See also S"2 verbs.

(4) Verbs, whose final syllable in the Future has have generally nriB in the first syllable ; if n n s is the final syllable,

i 2

KAL. TO?

^135 •TO?

n:nh2

NIPHAL

-Qyu sT?^n r o s n

n?73^n


then ?UD is the first; as ttT?0-, ^bri?.. In some cases, there i« a silent KJp under the first radical, when it is a n or a n. Examples :—

to take in pledge,

în to gird, ^rr., "fcofl. VIP

to cease.

Dpn to be wise, ESOJ, ^ A ? n j . ion to covet, ibrr, ibnn ; Niphal TODJ. bpn bbn^bann. ôrr 0 w w / , -IODJ, -ipr™, ^Prn. V5n to cfe**re, V " 5 ^ , V^CTE, ^blT_.

ntt?n to think, at&CP.; Niphal n # n ; .

(5) The Verb TJEH to turn, overthrow, makes its Niphal "^SH?, T : v v 7 T ; - : •.• •

A.

EXERCISE 27.

1. Write out the Niphal Perfect and Future of ^SIl-

2. Write out the whole of the Hiphil of pTH.

3. Give the Future Kal, Piel, and Hiphil of IDH, and

the Participles of the same conjugations.

4. Translate and parse: (a) ^nT&SJP!; (b) DWlljttl;

B. Translate and parse each verb.

btfnip) \?3-n^ ansa -YPSS*! 2. ib n^-b?-n^ - Q ^ I l.

^rib# 'n sa^yi 6. npeipn ^ 3 bens D ^ V5# *H??$* O. nnbb ?i?^n Q nb t mn by DBzpq DJ-iyy 7. -^.|yb

.-inn nnn i-npvrn t^lP^l 8.

GUTTURAL VERBS. 117

c. 1. And he overthrew those cities and all the plain.

2. Do not be wise in thine [own] eyes, for men will think thee a fool. 3. The heart of her husband trusteth {Perfect) in her, and he shall not lack spoil. 4. The land shall be divided by lot. 5. I have caused thy iniquity to pass from off ( = upon) thee. 6. Slay them not, lest my people forget (Fut.). 7. And A braham rose up early in the morning, and saddled his ass.

110. B. Verbs with the Second Radical a Guttural (y Guttural), e.g. 7K5 to redeem*

The forms with N)tp under the second radical, and the Pi el Pual, and Hithpael requiring a Dogesh in the second radical, cause the change of vowels in these Gutturals (see § 105).

The Hiphil and Hophal are like the ordinary verb (see Comparative Table, § 140, p. 167).*

Perfect;— KAL. b«?

nbsa

^83

NIPHAL.

bSp nbasa

T "

PIEL.

bs? nb^? ^ S S ^ £ 3

^W. ^feS

Erf?W3 j#*?wa ^bws

PUAL.

b&i nbyn i?Sâ &&

^bsa *bi$&

• J - I 1 ? ^

1^b«2 ••o*?ria"

HITHPAEL. bw?on

nbxôn n ^ o n ^?^nn

^ t f i r i n sfceaon

DflVsjorr ^ a a n r r ^S«|rtn

* Note the Hophal forms n^NJn, 6 « a n , ."l fcOn , etc.


Future:-

KAL. bs:r.

bs^n bsan ^bsnn bwritf 'ibfcffi

njbsrtn •ibfefii?

mbtfjn b«?5

NIPHAL. bm>

bân bw?n ^bwun b«?« bw>

nabMan •SbNSfi

n?b«?n

bw|5

PIEL. b ^ .

bwan bwjn

^b«an b^?W' •SbNT

mbfron Jibsnn

nab«an

*W??

PUAL. b&p

bwnn b&n bwan bsas ^bsr

njb&in ^b&in

nib&n bsaa

HITHPAEL. b«?/T.

bs |nn bsarin ^bsann bsan« sibMarv

nabsann •ibsann

mbyjnn bNarq

Imperative:—

KAL. b«a "byi •ibwa

njbî

NIPHAL. bsan ^bsan !)bw|n

njbw|n

Infinitive:—

KAL.

Abs. bis? Const, bsa

PIEL. b«| ^ ? !)bN2

~: T

njb«?

HITHPAEL. bssnrr

^b«ann nb^|nn

rabw|i7in

PIEL.

bsa

PUAL. HITHPAEL.

bsann

Participles:—

KAL.

Act. b & , n b & Pass. blNJ

PIEL.

b«a» PUAL. HITHPAEL.

GUTTURAL VERBS. 119

111.

Notes:—(1) Verbs with 1 as the medial radical are irregular in the Piel, Pual, and Hithpael. They further (a) prefer ETin in the Kal like the ordinary Regular form: P^P. he will sprinkle, *P?^. he will burn. So also in the Imperatives: P~>T, "H^S. (b) Instead of the nna *1PD, the "I sometimes takes a ^ ) ^ \ Thus, compare the following forms with those of

Perfect Piel of T O : n ? ^ , JD^S; Pua l : n y ^ a , SDna. Future KB,]: ^lb\^W^.; Pual : ^ r p V

(2) Many verbs with n, n, or J? as the medial radical, omit the Strong Dogesh without lengthening the preceding vowel. Thus : ]H3, D m , GOD, "IS?, instead of IDS, DTO, DTO, TtfS. The Dogesh thus omitted in writing, and not compensated for, is called the Implied or Hidden Strong Dogesh; it was probably not entirely omitted in pronunciation.

E X E R C I S E 28.

A.

1. Give the Piel throughout of T ] 3 .

2. Wr i t e down the Part iciples Ka l and Hi thpae l of

Dili with the Personal Pronouns.

3. Give the 3rd Person Masculine Plura l of the Fu tu res

of the seven conjugations of tT\W and tDhfe?.

B. Translate and parse each ve rb :—

nttJo urn urn nstann -v»yip nsi 2. isnfcffi QBhr: i. Y!W ninety bb *j3 0"]351TpTpS nypsi 3. TJ^ nam

rrTja ji*S n^-ig e. oa? ^qV*l ^nip? nwnpb n\ntpb9 oâ» Tj-ptf 8. ^ 0 1 ^ " S ^1?? n^n 7. nb nose ]NS*

.^nhn bos? D tpap \>vsT


c. 1. Bless me, m y father. 2. And they cried wi th a

loud voice, Do not forsake us. 3. A t t ha t t ime the Lord

separated the t r ibe of Levi to s tand before the Lord to

minis ter to him, and to bless in his name unto this day.

4. And ye have driven me from my father 's house.

5. W h y askest thou (/!) Abishag for Adonijah ? bu t

ask {/.) for him the kingdom, for he is m y elder* brother.

6. And let us right l ike men. 7. As a man whom his

mother comforteth {Future), so will I comfort you, and in

Jerusalem shall ye be comforted. 8. Kemember y e the

grea t and revered God, and fight ye for your bre thren,

your sons and your daughters , your wives and your

houses.

112. 0 . Verbs with the Third Radical a Guttural (7 Gut tural) ,

£• g. Tw$ to send (only refers to verbs ending in T\ or J?, see

§ 113).

The variations of these Gutturals consist of:—

(1) The preference for the vowel rt?B, instead of DJIH or *"?.>?. Thus : rh& instead of Phi?]; rkw\ instead of n\>W).

(2) The addition of the Furtive nrj$ [see § o, p. 5), under the third radical at the end of a word, when a long vowel (except a Vl?ty precedes. Thus : JTbEtfrj instead of m b ^ T l ; ribittf instead of nbitf; iyb$ instead of rabip; nibttinsiead'of nibitf.

(3) The use of the helping nnsj- in the forms of the 2nd Person Feminine Singular of the Perfect, in place of a #)?', for the sake of euphony. Thus: ntf?® instead of tfnbE?; nrbwTl instead of

* Translate for he is my brother, the older than me. f This helping fTHS is another usage of the Furtive n n s .

GUTTURAL VERBS. 121

Perfect:— KAL.

rbw

nnbir w.B.înbtt?

etc.

NIPHAL. PIEL.

nnbti;3 nnb^ nnbtp

^nbp^ I r-iribw \nnbttb | \nnbtt?

etc. etc.

PUAL.

nbttf nnbtr nnhw nribw

^rnnhw etc.

HIPHIL.

rnbcrn nrrbttfn nrbwn nrhwn

\nnbtpn etc.

HOPHAL. nbtrn

nnbajn nnbt rn nrhwn

v-rnbtfn etc.

HITHPAEL.

nbritpn

nnbnpn nnbtfpn

^nnbtf^n etc.

Future:-KAL.

rbw> rbwn rbwn

>rbwn nbt** Trbtt?>

roribafa nribaJn

njnbt^n rf???3

NIPHAL. nbt&n

ribaJn nbt^n

>rbwn

nb&N •iribt^

rranbt^n •inb$ri

mnb&n nbgfa

PIEL. PUAL.

nbar: nbp^ ribwn i nbtrn nbtrn

^nbtpn nbtrs ^nber

nanbtwn •Trbpi-i

mnbtpn nbt£j

nbtzfri •^nbtpn nbtp« •nnbttr*

njnbtrn ^nbcrn

ronbtfn nbtp?

HIPHIL.

r rb t^ rpbttfn mbtrn

•*rrbtppi rrbaJs .irrbari

mribafri •nrrbttto

naribttfri irbsfa

HOPHAL. | HITHPAEL

nbarj ! nbnp> rbwn '• rrbnttfn rhwn ; nbnttfn

^nbcjri : ^nbntpri nbtt?s j nbntps nnbttr -inbnt^

njnb^ri ;njnbEi?to •inbtyn -inbritpn

njnbtpri n jnbnpfi ribpj nbntp::

Imperative:-KAL.

nbttf

TrbaJ

•vrbtp rorihtp

NIPHAL.

rib^n ^nb^n •irfwrr

n j n ^ n

PIEL.

nba?

^nbttf tnbitf

njnbttf

HIPHIL.

nbttfn imbttfrr •rpbafrT

njnbtpn

HITHPAEL.

nbntt?n TfbnaJn •inbntpn

njnbntpn

Infinitive:— KAL.

Abs^ n ib? ;

Const, nb^?

NIPHAL.

ribtfj n b $ n

PIEL.

n W nbttf

PUAL.

nbtf

HIPHIL. n b # n

n^b^n

HOPHAL. nbttfrr n b ^ n

HITHPAEL.

nbntpn


Participles :— KAL. jNIPHAL PIEL. PUAL, HIPHIL. HOPHAL.

Act. nbttf* I | rjbwv n^btps Pass, rnbtp nbttb ' nbtt?p nbtpE

HITHPAEL.

113. Notes:—(I) Verbs with 1 as third radical have no variations.

(2) n'/(?, N"?. Verbs with N or n as third radical belong to separate classes of Irregular Verbs (§ H o , p. 124), and must not be conjugated like

(3) The Jussive of the Hiphil is rh&l, nbtptf. So also the forms with 1 Conversive, as H ^ ^ l and he caused to spring forth, 372HP51 and he caused to swear.

(4) The Accusative Suffixes cause some changes in the vowels in the following forms :—

Kal Future: ^rbw he will send me (not ^rf?tp.), ^ n b ^ or ^rhw\ (not ^nnb$^ o n b ^ (not onb^.)-

Kal Imperative: ^nbttf send me (not ^ O b ^ ) , ^nnbtp, nnbtp, • ^ n b p , etc.

(5) Observe the nns t|BQ under the n in Ôb^tf, ^Dbttf_^ ^rrbtpN.

(6) Pausal Forms: Niphal n b ^ , etc.; Piel nbtp, etc., nbttf> ;

Hithpael nb/nt£Jn, nb£ttp\ (These forms are sometimes used even when not pausal).

EXERCISE 29.

A. 1, Write out the Kal of V\W.

2. Give the Perfect of the Niphal, and Hiphil of Pl&X andJD^. •

3. Write out the 3rd Person Fern. Sing, of the Future of the seven conjugations of HJlS and T*?y.

* (/.) nnV&» or nnV , nmhwf nin1? .

GUTTURAL VERBS. 123

B. Translate and parse each verb :—

^Vin? 2. *P9 b^ rEqh ribi n^ro sb anoB cmb$ D«h: I . n« v^yri pspn 5 3. ctpjBl ^nb$ ns^wn >aJin> -n^ rnp^ri nnn^ ^rpiai TjiN ^n$s spai TN 4. b«n^. 5.3 05119 n-ins i^fj 6. 7-iaf? b | rn^ri ^ 5 b? sn:pn ?jb •*? 5. bss nsT] 8. s?nb^ >??n • nbtps p n# 7. vyrbq^ DjiaP? b | bs nvnri nnzn ]ias» 9. nn ib ^s n?bn-ni^ n^n

C. 1. I t is better to trust in the Lord than to trust in

princes. 2. The righteous man shall flourish like the palm. 3. And they rose up early in the morning and they sware one to another, and Isaac let them go. 4. Have I not caused thee to swear by the Lord ? 5. Ye shall not swear by my name to falsehood. 6. For the Lord of Hosts has sent me unto thee, as he hath sworn unto thy fathers.

CHAPTER XIII.

T H E VERB—(continued).

114. The Irregu lar V e r b (see § 77, p. 77).

There are two main classes of Irregular Verbs:—

A. Those in which one of the radicals is assimilated or

absorbed in the letter following it, called Imperfect or Defective

Verbs (DnDPl).


B. Those t ha t have one of t he Quiescent le t ters ''VPI'N

(see § 4, p. 4) as a radical, called Quiescent Verbs (D*H3).

115. A. The Imperfect or Defective Verbs comprise :—

1. }"S* Verbs, as J?J3 to draw near.

2. y / ;y* Verbs, or (Reduplicated), as M D to surround.

B. The Quiescent Verbs comprise :—

1. K"S Verbs, as h^X to eat.

2. *"fi Verbs, as 1W to sit.

3. )'y Verbs, as Q)p to rise.

4. X"b Verbs, as KXtt to find,

5. H"? Verbs, as to reveal. T T

116. A , I m p e r f e c t o r D e f e c t i v e V e r b s (DHDH).

I. J"S or 3'S **1DH (i.e., Defective in the F i rs t Radical

which is a 3); e.g., E^|} draw near.

The irregularities of verbs, whose first radical is J, are as follows :

(a) The oniUsion of the 2 in the middle of a word, wheu, with a Silent NVf under it, the 3 closes a syllable. Thus : tt?31 instead of ttfcfl, T ? n instead of T J ? n , VBl instead of VQ31, >J?l?8ia (Niphal) instead of ^W?JJ3; tt?|0 for ttf|?B. Wherever this J is omitted, a Dogesh is placed in the next letter.

(b) The omission of the J in the Kal Imperative, and in the Kal Infinitive Construct. Thus : fife for B&3, n # 3 for ttb?.

(c) The addition of H ^ (or, with a Guttural, r i r , J"I373 from 3T22) to the Infinitive Kal,

* For explanation of these terms, see § 107. p. 113.

3//2 VERBS. 125

KAL.

Regular.

NIPHAL. mi

nafeo nwn

! W2? ^nw^

•1tt7|5 Dnti?2D

• vjsfe? •13^33

HIPHIL. t ^ j n

rrttrw F\WZ71

nwzri \n£73n

w^n origin 7tftP|n soipin

HOPHAL. ttfin

rrir|n PITOH

nran •vnran

sittran aaân 7$?fen •13^|H

Future:— KAL.

tt?3fl

tt?3$

tP33

NIPHAL.

Regular.

HIPHIL

npipgn ^ 3 3

HOPHAL.

Bran

njtpari

Imperative;—

KAL.

(n#3) ttfe or tt?3

773tp3 or H3^3

HIPHrL.

I (nw^ri) tran

rntran

Infinitive:— KAL.

Abs. t^33

Const. n tp j*

HIPHIL.

win w^ri

HOPHAL

ttfan mrt

Participle ;— NIPHAL. I HIPHIL. ) HOPHAL.

* (w»i f iw5)


117. Notes: — (1) The Piel, Pual, and Hithpael are throughout regu

lar (see Comparative Table, § 140, p. 167).

(2) The Hophal throughout has the vowel f ^ P .

bS2 (3) T h e V e r b ^ 5 to fall, has — Kal Future Imperative Infinitive Construct

]i!3 (4) The Verb ]Cl2 /o grc'ye, has the following forms:— Kal Perfect ]0? , n j r f l , n n j ( = r^flT) (also abbreviated to

nriri), riro, ^ n j (= vjiijnj), wpj, DCITO, ^ n j . Future 1 C V fCltf, ]#£*. Imperative Ifl ( n ? ^ ) , *W, W ? . Infinitive ] i n ? ; Construct HW ( = njf l) [V-lfi my giving, ifiJ-1,

etc.]. Note form iHu? fo grê.

npb (5) The Verb Hpb £0 taê, is conjugated as though it were a y'DVerb.

Kal Future n p \ nj?fl, nptf. Imperative n p (Hllp), Tip , -Tip. Infinitive Hipb; Construct Hnp ptfDP).

Niphal is regular n,f?:),npV; Hophal np>. (6) Some y'S Verbs, especially when the second radical is a

Guttural, retain the 2 in every form. Thus : from vH^ to inherit, Kal Vp. ; Hiphil ^rfpr^n; f torn 3HJ ^0 fe#d, ^ n ? \

EXERCISE 30. A. ,

1. Write out the Kal of }r0 and p||T>.

2. Give the primary forms o£ the Future of ^33 and

3. Write out the Hiphil Perfect, Future and Participle of hty and * m

* Observe the idiom ]P\) D ( = who will give?) in the sense of " 0 would that!" or (i 0 ! that I had." Example:—31V l^^P would that it were evening !

3"D VERBS. 127


^n?l 6. V?J? 5. innp5 4. l$ni 3. TO©?} 2. b§^ 1. n^?«i 12. yjbrr 11. ra*:} 10. ys£9. nTjn 8. nj rii 7.

G.

?jb Tan 2. ^ w rrfin ^n-bs1) ?p3K ~>P^ ^3 VKW 1. >? nn?p tjbp1? im 3. *T P ani1* 'n r\m nift-np ens b-iMtt; &3!i 4. syn-b^ ^7951 nins 23b ysiini nvr} mn nps nn$ 6. t^3"i$n ttf«n3 ^3^1 ~itfps srftfii 5. inxQs -ns i sm D^?5P3 bsnp>->^ vyis bp npQ n^« 'nb s-in •gsfr Di-iMsi npa \2D ^051 7. b^n snv-ia-nsn anso ]nb ^ n 9. tthpa nnaJ1? nsygn-bp DJji?fcQ is 8. opwiH riri nits 10. i^n«3 n~jn3 vnbsn:i njniDjtf rea#j n-n is

-ns? ^b ^riri oyflii? n . ins tt?>sb nnw >nn$ tjb nns ^Tnpjp â?SJ? biwt?3 7^ ^ 12. opb -inpn Wjnb3 n^p ^Vsr? wn rmn iyy\ •nyn Tp b>-?n ntf# 'n 13.

.ntn ^rcbgn

D.

1. And Abraham rose up early in the morning, and he took bread and a bottle of water, and he gave to Hagar, and he sent her forth. 2. And Saul took the sword and fell upon it. 3. And they sowed fields and planted vineyards. 4. Only with thy eyes shall thou behold. 5. Who beholdeth the earth and it quaketh; he toucheth (fut.) the mountains and they emit smoke. 6. And she did not tell her husband Nabal. 7. And he drew near and he


kissed him. 8. I t is bet ter t ha t thou shouldst not vow

than t ha t thou shouldst vow and not pay. 9. And ye shall

t a k e a bunch of hyssop, and dip fit] in the blood which

is in the basin, and cause [i t] to touch u n t o the lintel and

unto the two doorposts. 10. When I give my sword in to

the hand of the k ing of Babylon. 11 . And the Lord

gave to Israel all t he land t ha t he sware to give un to

their fathers. 12. Deliver me from the workers of

iniquitj^. 13. O would tha t (see footnote, p . 126) all the

people of the Lord were prophets . 14. Tell (fern.) me

w h a t thou has t in the house.

118. A . — I m p e r f e c t V e r b s (continued).

I I . y"y or DV^lSS (reduplicated), e.g. i 3 p to surround.

The irregularities of Verbs, whose last two radical* are alike,

are :—

(a) The contraction of the second and third radical into one, as :

s ap for W p , 2D for ^ 5 p .

(b) The Dogesh, compensating for the omission of one of the

radicals, is dropped if the radical is at the end of the word, as :

np (not 3D), 20) (not Sip J), but top, sap; , sap?, etc.

(c) When the pronominal suffix begins with 3 or ^ , * a vowel is

inserted before it, in order to render audible the Dogesh of the final

radical. In the Perfect, this vowel is Djin? a s VTi2D, SDi3P3. In

the Future and Imperative, the vowel is ^ 9 with ^ following ( V ) ,

as ny^Dj-i, rn^pn. (d) The ** added in the Hiphil in other Yerbs is not found in this

class of Verbs.

* Called the heavy suffixes.

TV VERBS. 129

perfect;—

KAL.

ap nap

n i a p n i a p

\n iap •lap

cn i ap i r r iap ^ i a p

NIPHAL.

ap2

n a p j n iaos niaos

vviap? siapj

cniap::

j f l iap? •1312103

PIEL (PO-EL).

aaio narpo m a i n r n a i o

^nnniD âaio

Dnnnio IJ-DaiD

503310

PUAL (PO-AL).

a3io naaio m a i n n33io

^nnnio •âiD

D r m i D ltf33iD

J0331D

HIPHIL.

2QV n a p n

r h a o n n i a p n

\n i sp r j

^'orj • n i a p n

j n i a p q toiaprj

HOPHAL.

apîn nao-in

n i a c i n n iap^n

VYiap-irr •lapîn

cn iap^n lOiap^n •wap^n

HITHPAEL.

a 3 i n p n n a a i n o n n a a i n p n r m i n p n

^ a a i n p n •laainpn

D r m i n p n

7i535inprr s)333wprr

Future.

3D1 abn abn

•optf ab$

np>

Vfjjibff : *apn

•nj3bri

rib?

KAL.

j ab^ abri abri

>abn nb« •iab>

n ^ a ^ !)2riDJJ

n j ^ D f l ab?

NIPHAL.

np^. apn apn

âpn ap$ •iap^.

nrâpn •lapri

n2>3pn

^P?

PIEL (PO-EL).

aaio*; aaio^ aato^ ^33iDî aaioi*

sasrioj-i nroaio^

PUAL (PO-AL).

aaho^ n3ion n3ion

^33ioî

aaio*$

T : - :

nj33io^ a3it>:>

HIPHIL.

;apvornp\>|

spn

spn

^3P^

-lap j n j ^ p f l

âpn nyspsi

ans

HOPHAL.

ap^ ap in apvi

•»3PW ap is siap-v

n a ^ p w siapvi

ao-12

HITHPAEL.

a3i^P^. 33'viPfl a3inpn

•oainpn a3i^ptf SQ3WP1

nj33inpn •larn^pri

nj33iripn aaino?

1 Imperative:-: KAL.

ao

\ âb ? -iab

I n '^

NIPHAL.

apn âpn

•lapn

ro>3pn

PIEL.

aaio "Wto

••nano nrqaio

HIPHIL.

^pn ^?pn

•iapn

nj^spo

HITHPAEL.

a3i^pn >aainpn

•laainpn

n533i^pn

K


Infinitive:— KAL.

Abs. ninp Const . 2D

NIPHAL.

niDn 25>n

PIEL.

roiD •>i

PUAL.

nnio »

HIPHIL.

*2Qr\

??

HITHPAEL.

nrnnpn ??

Participle:— KAL.

2 ? D

nsap

NIPHAL.

2D3

(/. ntti)

PIEL.

n y i D E

PUAL.

SniDZp

HIPHIL.

^PP HOPHAL.

np-^ HITHPAEL.

nninpp

119. xVo/es.—(1) The forms 2©% ^fetf (Kal) are called the Chaldaic

or Aramaic forms. (2) The Piel, Pual, and Hithpael forms, having the vowel

throughout, should more correctly be named the Po-el, Po-al, Hith-po-el (see § 95, p. 106).

(3) The Kal Future with 1 Conversive changes to ^P*l, ^pJ?l . The Hiphil Future with 1 Conversive changes to ^?*L

(4) The Kal Future with Accusative suffixes changes to s?5p% JinSpV The Hiphil Future with Accusative suffixes changes to

(5) Some verbs remain regular in the Kal Perfect ; as from EftT to intend, ^ ? ) J ; from TtSL to take as spoil, ^.tTS. Of ^ 5 p , the ?followiug forms exist: ^ 5 p he surrounded, and * ^ ^ p .

(6) Many verbs have regular forms for the Piel, Pual, and Hithpael. Examples : — n ^ \ he will praise, vvrr^P praised, M?bnFI you will profane, ^yLTfT he will boast (praise himself).

E X E R C I S E 31.

A. 1. Conjugate the Hiphi l of Dfti^.

2. Give the Impera t ives of the Nipha l and Hi thpae l of

y"y VERBS. i 3 i

3. Write out the Hithpael Perfect and Future of prt and

TT3.

4. Give the 2nd Person Feminine Singular Future of the seven conjugations of *1*V2 and DD&.

B. Parse and translate:—

rifiy. 5. iirttVpn 4. nrpn nv 3. ipm 2. w 1. /"is^ 10. W ^ 9. -ibb 8. is Êtf-bN 7. nj^WU 6.

C. nnno sigiDji 2. 'n-bs b*?9Wl -i^n bs ^35-nN ng?i 1. ins nrfyO) 3. trsn vjgp E'H? rofts/r D pipsrn vnnn iEl?2b 'n n-n born 4. ^nsnr-i obis n^n D?\rrnb 71b nn tens nan ]rpp-ns *r??b nn \nibnrj 5. n n2D25 bps 5 7. C M "nJp'STiM ^?mi : ]h« n ^ - n s \narn 6. -bs 9. n?-]N D^QS r n -r^ s. ^ n Jimj n»i npjrriy bbn^n V-ron ^tp-ngi Pit£npl 10. nnDES "tfn bbnrn

D. 1. This day I have rolled away the reproach of Egypt

from off you. 2. Pass ye and surround the city seven times. 3. And Aaron was silent. 4. And they plundered the camp of Syria. 5. Not like the covenant which I made ( = c u t ) with them which they have frustrated. 6. And I will desolate her vine and her fig. 7. And they profaned my holy name. 8. What is this evil thing that ye profane the Sabbath-day? 9, Our brothers have caused our hearts to melt. 10. Everyone who passes by thee shall be astonished and shall hiss.

K 2


CHAPTER XIV.

IRREGULAR VERBS— (continued).

120. B.—Quiescent Verbs (DW).

L—K"fi or «fffi TIJ, *.?., SsK to *r*. The peculiarities of verbs whose first letter is N, are:—

(a) In every conjugation, except the Kal only, they are treated like Q Gutturals (see "D? § 108, p. 114).

(b) In the Kal Future the first syllable has ^ 5 ? followed by ^ D 5|$n:i as ^D»., OT^J, îtjBfl.

N.B.—(c) In the following six verbs there are additional irregularities, viz., 73N to eat, ~>£N fo say, "QN to perish, TH^ fo seise, HDW fo consent, HDS fo &«£e.

In the Future Kal the first vowel is D^n, as b ^ Ae will eat.

In the 1st Person Singular, when the X would occur twice, one X

is dropped, as brfa for br>H«.

1 2 0 a , Kal F u t u r e of ord inary N"S Verbs:

*pg£ *P$# fpfcjft

^pwn ^bfc?« ^Dtf>

m=?b n •isp^n

n^byn •tfHSJ

Imperative.

*P8 >2DW

• SpM n??b«

Infinitive.

*liDM Absolute.

Fp^ Construct

M7Q VERBS. 133

120b. Kal Future of the four Irregular Verbs, S^X, "TOM,

b?Nv

br>sn

^bssn

robpsn •ib^n

njbssn 7 b»b

Imperatives.

^bps ^b?s

robbs

Infinitives.

biDS Absolute.

-bb« Construct.

Pausal forms of the Future: b jN^ bpwn, ^bsstt, sibjri^ -Sbprfn, bp«3.

Observe the forms ,")»ris,l and "lBri»!

awe/ Ac 5020*.

Note.—The verbs H2^ to consent, and HDS /# bake, have the

same peculiarities as in their first radical, but, in the second

syllable, resemble T\"? verbs (see § 127, p. 147). Thus, Kal Perfect,

7-QW, n m « , HON, ™ ? « , etc.; HEN, nriBN, iTS£, etc. Kal

Future, r Q N \ PQSn, H3N, =0***, n j ^ f i , etc.; nDN>, HDNP,

ns's, ^ s \ m^rin, etc.

EXERCISE 32.

A. 1. Give in full the Kal of 11K.

2. Write out the Hiphil Perfect and Future of ^3*$.

3. Give the seven primary forms Future of THX and

t)DK.

4. Write out the Hophal Perfect and Participle of Ifitt

and 1DM.

Note the form £0 say, saying.


npg a^nan >TO bsî n^bcp nj^B? ] 9ffl ^ l.

^nr™ nsyb? 4. /TOP nn^n s^nn tr^n-n^ v-nasrn 3. nwr nbsb bfcntp? N??-btf ^?î 5. ^rnin vjrfc D^ttha ^9^*1 6. YIW1"^ Bft? n^n^n bsp -ibpsn n^« n;nn niD^ nbM DS 7. " ^ ">»tf*l ^1?^ ^"33^ -ittra iv br>« «b *Tvf? ^ 8. ^ - n y i ^ntps-n^ îtf-nw vwn$ 35*7 QJ-OBBff rfb ^ 9. H!?n-ris nhsi!l b^tjrrb?-n$ *pg;i nnps-n^ Tjb n nn^^. 10. bhn?r) ^3 vpvb ^ttf^pnb >s

.Deafen bsD C.

1. The hope of the righteous man is gladness; but ( = and) the expectation of the wicked man shall perish. 2. For ye shall certainly perish speedily from off the earth. 3. And Isaac loved Esau, for there was venison in his mouth, and Rebecca loved (Kal Part. Act) Jacob. 4. And they said unto him, "Say now Shibboleth"; and he said " Sibboleth"; and they seized him and slew (tanttf) him by the fords of the Jordan; and there fell at that time from Ephraim forty thousand men. 5. And I will send forth fire against the wall of Gaza, and it shall consume the palaces thereof. 6. And Moses said " When the Lord giveth to you in the evening flesh to eat." 7. Every male among the priests shall eat it ( / ) ; it is most holy (=holiness of holinesses). 8. And Delilah said unto Samson, "Tell (with cohortative n) me with what thou shouldst be bound." 9. Put forth thy hand and seize its tail; and he put forth his hand and he laid hold of it. 10. Thus shalt thou say unto the children of Israel.

v'D VERBS. 135

121 . Q u i e s c e n t V e r b s (continued), V/S or v /£ Tl3 .

I I .—There are two classes of Verbs V ' S : —

A. Those t rea ted as though the first radical was a 1, and

which were originally Y'S Verbs, as 3B^ to sit, }?*T to know.

The irregulari t ies of th is class are :—

(a) I n the Kal Fu tu re , Impera t ive and Infinitive, t he first

radical is dropped, ^B^# instead of ^ B ^ ; !2B*; H^B*-

(#) I n the Niphal , Hiphi l and Hophal , the original 1

appears. Niphal SBî instead of i B ^ J ; iB ty instead

of S B ^ . ; Hiphi l y e n r i ; Hopha l SB*|Pl. So also fre

quent ly in Hi thpael , as JTl lJ in .

B. Those t ha t are s t r ic t ly v ' i3. Such are i t s* to fo #00^,

B^5^ t° oe dry, T*p! t° ciwake, ^ ^ to form, p^ to suck, and 1$\

to be right. These re ta in the first radical in the Kal and

H i p h i l : 2Q*\, i*tpV.; in other respects t hey are l ike Class A.

Perfect:—

CLASS A.

KAL. nttTj

etc.

*"£) (originally )"£).

NIPHAL. 1WK

etc.

HIPHIL.

n^n etc.

HOPHAL.

sawn etc.

HITHPAEL.

ntôn etc.

CLASS B. *"fi.

KAL. I NIPHAL.

etc. etc.

HIPHIL.

etc.

HOPHAL.

etc.

HITHPAEL.

etc.


Future:—

C L A S S A.

KAL.

etc.

NIPHAL.

etc .

HIPHIL.

e tc .

HOPHAL.

etc .

HITHPAEL.

e tc .

C L A S S B.

K A L .

etc.

NIPHAL.

etc.

HIPHIL.

etc.

HOPHAL.

e tc .

HITHPAEL.

e tc .

Imperative.

CLASS A.

KAL.

stp •qp •ine?

rorja?

NIPHAL.

ntpnn •oahn ••nafarr

r\;^wyi

HIPHIL.

ni&in qîpin Ja^ in

rtûnn

CLASS B.

KAL. n^1

^SP"! etc .

HIPHIL.

W U q>t^n

etc.

Infinitive:—

KAL.

Abs. nttrj, nit^ Const . riStt? pJ=D#) , ^

NIPHAL. HIPHIL.

.ntpin, n^n HOPHAL.

Participle:—

KAL. NIPHAL. HIPHIL. HOPHAL.

«/'S VERBS. 137

122. Notes.—(1) 'a. Of 2tt?;. The Kal Future with 1 Conversive

changes to S t ^ V the Hiphil Future to ntpVI. (2) 6. Of ^ . The Kal Future with 1 Conversive is n £ ^ ; the

Hiphil Future is S t ^ . l .

TfbrT (3) The verb ^7*7 to go, is conjugated like a *"fi Verb. Kal Future TT .% ^ b n ( T j ^ ) ; Imperative ^ (or rp1?), ^ b , ^ ,

HJpb; Infinitive Absolute TfibrT; Construct n p b ( V ^ S ) . Hiphil Tpbin, -pbv ( bi>V). Hithpael TyyniTirT Ae walked to and fro, ivalked about.

N.B.—Note the idiom ~)iDrT) Tjibn (both Infinitives) going and

decreasing, i.e. gradually decreasing.

(4) The verbs )W) to sleep, and EH^ to inherit, have Kal Future jar*, ]EW ; an.^., ttTpN; both thus resemble, in the Kal, Class I I .

(o) A few verbs *"S resemble, in their peculiarities, f£ verbs, particularly in their Hiphil forms; such are p?J to pour out, iHSJ fo ftMr«, ^ to stand, 2lSJ to place. Kal p'SI; Hiphil p^SH, JTBil, ^ ? n , r p ? n ; J ?n§n becomes J-1S71 (like n i | , p. 90, footnote).

b!r (6) The verb ^ to 6e #&/e, has, as its Future, the Hophal

forms The Kal Future does not exist. HDS CO ^ u e v e r b Î^T ^ ac?c?, to continue, is frequently joined to

another verb to express the idea of again; (a) either with the Infinitive, as n i f r s b :>NON Plpi*l arcd Âafc again did, nhw P]ph nji8 ' /!"/!^ aftd ê again let the dove go; (b) or, with the finite verb,

^B*- and Elijah again said. The verbs S W to return, and HD*7 £o increase, are used similarly. Examples: bhT)^ v?2 DH !)35»1 !Q51tt7»5 and the children of Israel also ivept again; D W ? / HSri/l he did abundantly.

E X E R C I S E 33. A.

1. Wr i t e out the 2nd Person Masculine P lura l F u t u r e

of the Kal and Hiphi l of # Y , *^7T\ and 11$.


2. Conjugate the Infinitive Construct Kal of J^V, with all its Accusative pronominal suffixes.

3. Give the Perfect Hiphil and Hithpael of ^7H and


•vrnirTi 5. n:p?M 4. ^n^^nn 3. ^J-pb?^ 2. T>bin 1. •vn^-b« *p^ STinn:? 8. D^tpiE 7. ^55*5 6.

C. ngteb W3 nnbs-ng 75*1 t^sn-n^ r©t&b nwn bwvi 1. n^nb-i nsbbn nswb rhnb b?^ nriftb ^ss> âJn? 2. ttb^j-n ^ndsn -ibsb nziftri by$ iTjvw Q??TT

n^^^- 3. n^ri*? 5. na^M p SHN n^s 4. vby nbd nw# I T din 'O DD^58 ^ n nbwb ^mbirfp^ ^b t^sn bsd bisd -i»^ p 17-TD yiT>n nbsrr nny^rr ^s-by ib i|5i nw npb Tfbpri Tjb n vpya nt^n -ids rnsarn 6. m^TO-ny siTnin pbnn rrbs .npri*! 7. "n!?8D ^pya "9^n npî v-itjft nnft -nâ Tir b« -157 ?ipin-bs 8. tjbs -uarirn n-|n d^n or ;n rnjs n^ cib^nb b?^ rib cnnw Q?p? 9. n-m

.Nntpyi inpna bsi ^rrpin *T?N? bw 'n 10.

D. 1. Come,t children, hearken to me; the fear of the Lord

I will teach you. 2. Thy ways, O Lord! cause me to know; thy paths, teach me. 3. And the thing was pleasing in my eyes, and I took from you twelve men, one man to the tribe. 4. And we said, We cannot go down : if our young brother is with us, then (=and) we will go down. 5. And were born unto him seven sons and three

* according to the tenor of. t Use ^ 7 .

fy VERBS. 139

daughters . 6. And t hey ( / . ) sought to go to walk to and

fro in the e a r t h ; and he said, Go ye, wa lk ye to and fro

in the e a r t h ; and they ( / ) walked to and fro in the

earth. 7. And the daughter of Pharaoh said un to her,

" Take qSn, HiphiT) th is child, and suckle i t for me, and

I will give thee h i r e" ; and the woman took the child and

she suckled it. 8. And you have forsaken me, and you

have served other gods, therefore I will no longer ( = 1

will not continue to) save you, 9. And Micah said, Now

I know {Perfect) t h a t the Lord will do well wi th me.

10. And I led you in the wilderness forty years to inher i t

the land of the Amorite .

1 2 3 . B . — Q u i e s c e n t Verbs—{continued).

I I I . — W i t h 1 as the middle rad ica l ; )'y, e.g. D*lD to arise.

The irregularities of Verbs )"V are as follows :—

{a) The ) frequently disappears, as it is quiescent.

{b) In the Piel, Pual and Hithpael, the third radical is doubled in the forms E ^ P , EEftp and DpipiTin. These conjugations are called Po-lel, Po-lal and Hithpo-lel {cp. Verbs y"y).

(c) In the Perfect of the Niphal and Hiphil, the forms i ^ p ? and iD^prj are used before the heavy pronominal suffixes, i.e. those commencing with n or J {cp. Verbs V"y).

There is a class of these Verbs called *"JJ, as *P5 to understand. These prefer the * as the middle radical in place of the 1 in the Kal. The tables will show the difference between Y'V and *"JJ Verbs. Many Verbs that are ^rV are also at the same time )"y, as E^P or DW to place, W>tp or WW) to rejoice. Hence CTtplJ and D-WJ, VT>V* and WfoT.


V'y Verbs. Perfect:—

KAL.

cp n?PT

npp

J?SP ^WP

•rap DflPp

W?P ^7?p

NIPHAL. nipa

n^ ip j

r\ia-ip5 m»*ip3

vrwytp?

raip? DfllfcsipS 7^tosip3 WEflp3

PO-LEL.

Qttip

H^S'lp riDftip

T : " '

npEnp ^nspEip

raeip DJTOEp

ir-ipErtp

•13»^P

PO-LAL. DErtp

nsp ip ;ro2ip

JTOfcip ^ p a i p

•raeip QCiipiDIp

7fl9B*lp ^pfcip

HIPHIL. D^pn

na^pn

ni^pq m^pn

\ n w p n

^ p t f o g w p r j I t fWpr j ^ w p r r

HOPHAL. Dp^n

mapsin riftp:in

T : ' -

J-iPR^n ^JTOi?in

rap=in Dtfpp^n ^9p-nn •^pp^n

HITHPO-LEL. Dîp i - in

rrosipcirr j-ittnipi-in T^ttipCin

^ n ^ S p r i n rapipnn

DEPBptfn

^pîpnn soBEipgn

*"JJ Verbs Kal Perfect.

J3, n j a , TO5, W S , W 3 , ^ Dflfn, toa. [Also: ^ 3 , n ? ' 3 , n i ^ ? , rfâ, ^ i a ^ S , ^ S , a p W ? , ^ 5 . ] The other forms are like those of O^p.

Future :— KAL.

~ Wfl\ MpJ? D lpn

ra^pn

Diptf S)WpJ

n^^pn •wipn

w p j

NIPHAL.

Dip*!

nipn Dipn

raipn Dip«

. sifcip'*. n j ^ i p r i

•ranpn

Dips

PO-LEL.

£®V) Dpipn ap ipn

ra&ipn

opips •Ittpip^

n j p p i p n rarppj-i

Q»ip3

PO-LAL.

raîp'j aîpiji D»ipi-i

raeipj-i apipN rapip^

m w i p f l TOQIpJ-l

D»ip3

HIPHIL. D>Px

D piJI D^pn

^ ' p t t D^pH

^ P : nraprt • ^ p r i

DN i?3

HOPHAL. DpV

npv i

np^n rapîn cp^«

rap^ rauppvi

rap-in

Dpsfc

HITHPO-LEL. DEnprr

nmpnn •Enpon

rapiprirp

DOipOS rapiprp

n rap ip r in ? ) ^ p n n

Diaiprg

*"y Kal Fu tu re .

V5J, ]vnp], NP3T1, V5$, ^ 3 ? , n r ? ' ^ , ^ n n , ^ 5 3 . The rest

like VS.

fV VERBS. 141

Imperative:— KAL.

[no*p] D-p >Wp •wip

™$p

NIPHAL.

Dipn WpTl

^pri

nj^pn

PO-LEL.

Q»ip

êp •laeip

rgipiDip

HIPHIL. opn [ n ^ p n ]

^PF •^>pn

roDprr T : '•• T

HITHPO-LEL. •Sip/prr

^ e i p o n

••DDffipW

njeoiporr

7y Impera t ive Kal.

^ 5 , v^?, - ^ 3 . The rest like )"V.

Infinitive:— KAL.

Abs. Dip

Const, tflp

NIPHAL.

nipn (Dip3).

mprr

PO-LEL.

Q 9 P

HIPHIL.

Dpn D^pn

HOPHAL.

Dp-vr

HITHPO-LEL.

nnpCin

•>y Kal. Abs. 73, Const. V%. The rest like 1"]/.

KAL.

*np,D-ip NIPHAL.

Dipj PO-LEL.

D»ipo PO-LAL. Dpipp

HIPHIL. HOPHAL.

Dj?IB HITHPO-LEL

a»iptf»

*"y exactly like O .

1 2 4 . Notes.—(1) V'JJ, Kal Future with 1 Conversive, Dp*! or Dp*!;

Kal Future Jussive, Dp;; *"?, ?3>T!, ]3J. l"y, Kal Future with Accusative Suffixes, ^Wp1!; *"tf, Kal Future

with Accusative Suffixes, ,OJ>3,,:.

(2) Hiphil Future with) Conversive, Dp*!; Hiphil Future Jussive, Dp."}; Hiphil Future with Accusative Suffixes, ^9NPV

(3) Many of the forms of the \'V Verbs resemble those of the »"V Verbs. Thus in the Hiphil; of ) % VTtopU; y"J>, ' - O ^ P D . Compare, also, the Po-el of the V"V ( n ^ D ) with the Polel of the )"V

* Fern., TOP.


(d2 ip ) ; the Po-al ( » t o ) with the Polal (O&ip). Hence, some verbs appear to derive their forms from two roots, as 5 ^ and VV"! to be evil, af=ltt and t&'gH? to/ee/.

rfift (4) The Verb rfiE /o die (Hiphil, to cause to die, to put to death, to slay), has the following forms :

Kal Perfect, HE, nnn, n.Pl&, ^ £ , -inq, ^ O B ; Participle, n $ ,

Hiphil Perfect, n^n, nn^n, ^ n , (rpflsoi), ^nÛ, Dtf rr. All the other Kal, Polel, Hiphil and Hophal forms are like Cflp.

Sin (5) The Verb N12 is to be found among the Doubly Irregular

Verbs, § 136, p. 160.

tth2 (6) The Verb ttWSi to be ashamed, has, Kal ttfel, V?ip2l ; Future,

afc?, ttfnp, wn?.. Hiphil, (1) ttron to J»M* to «Aame. (2) ETOSn (as from a root

E7^) £o &g _pw£ £o shame, TTtp>'D.')'n she ivas put to shame.

E X E R C I S E 34. A.

1. Wr i t e out the F u t u r e Kal of I t l » and D*B>.

2. Give the 3rd Person Masculine Singular F u t u r e

Hiphi l of DVl, wi th the accusative suffixes.

3. Give the Impera t ives Kal, Niphal and Hiphi l of

Mtf, 30* and agfl

B. Parse and t rans la te :—

*T09*nS 5. ^ysfrji i?in 4. 3n?.i 3. ^ p r p 2. nb^j i. .a^h?b 7. Djpnqa 6.

nnm 2. nbsn DV-QTO HEK rra4? "ram msan.vwi l T - : " • v •• T • T : - T • •• : - T - : - - I T T ~ A *

nysnn ^nnr ibnsn nn^t^l nin>ritp ^ i « bs ^*n DJTP nb ib stnnto i ift?$ b wtf? -irn^p^ 3. #nb mjpsi m^N •OH TH nnn apro n ^ -i#8 inrr^-ns 'n Dp>i 4. )bs arro? trips pan n r n p . D ^ ttpabtf 5. bbotp* «D?-bp ntpsn

i'y VERBS. 143

njs niw Dtfi 7. ^b^&n Q^prjq a^tfe • ' jaw^ ^fjE-i 6. apy rram -lannar! ribi v*?y55 "TO-TH nk'bip bior-iE s-in -bs npan ii^rf^ 8. fiov ^by? mi bpD? nwri nwx is

.nil )>bji nri-rn ^p^n Ty-b# n^Dj") sa-npb iîTH

1. And Kuth said, " Entreat ( / ) me not to leave thee ( / ) , to return from after thee : for where ( = to that which) thou goest (/tit.), I will go: and where thou lodgest, I will lodge: thy people shall be my people, and thy God my God." 2. And Samson said, " May my soul die with the Philistines," and he bowed himself (£3*1) with might: and the house fell upon the lords and upon all the people who were in i t : and the dead which he slew (FViti v.) in his death were more than (those) that he slew in his life. 3. And he lifted up the mantle of Elijah which had fallen from him, and he returned and he stood by ( = u p o n ) the shore of the Jordan. 4. The Lord maketh poor and enricheth: he bringeth low, also he raiseth on high. 5. Therefore I set my face like (the) flint: and I know that I will not be ashamed. 6. Let the king Solomon swear to me that he will not* kill his servant with the sword. 7. And there escaped not from them a man, except four hundred young men who rode upon the camels, and they fled. 8. The avenger of the blood, he shall slay the murderer: when he meets him, he shall slay him. 9. Dan shall judge his people as one of the tribes of Tsrael. 10. And my lovingkindness shall not depart from him, as I removed [it] from Saul whom I removed from before thee. 11. And he shall say on

* See § 94, 3, p. lOt, upon sentences expressing an oath.


t h a t day, " Behold, 0 God, this is [the one] we have hoped

OD^p) fo r n i m > and he will save us. This is the Lord, we

have hoped for h im : let us be glad and let us rejoice in

his salvation." 12. And the Lord will scat ter you among

the nations, and you shall be left few in number.

125 . B . — Q u i e s c e n t Verbs—(continued).

IV .—With K as t he th i rd radica l ; K"S, e.g. X¥& to find.

The irregulari t ies of X"7 Verbs are as follows :—

1. Owing to the fact that K is the third radical, and cannot he preceded by nri3? this vowel is changed into Y®PT when the X is the last letter of the word. 2. In front of the heavy pronominal suffixes, i.e. those commencing with 11 or i , the vowel is, in the Kal Perfect only, a Y®Pr. In all other conjugations, the vowel is r S (in the Perfect) and ^HD (in the Future). Examples:—N2E (not « ? ? ) ; Q W ? P (Kal Perfect), n s ^ ? (Niphal Perfect), mMSen (Kal Future).

tfh Verbs. Perfect :—

KAL.

W2E

n $ ? P

W W ntWQ

\TiN?ft

>)WSE

DO«?^ towsia

NIPHAL. W 7D2

n « 2 M

n s s M T •" ; •

nN893

V^HSW

•1MSP5 DC1S80?

SOHSM

PIEL. «39

nHBB

ns??tt

n s § p

^WS5 •i«§5

DflNSJS

^«s»

PUAL. H£E

nH£» naÊ

n«»D

W S E

SINBB

nnsgn

SDNBB

HIPHIL. s ^ n n

n w ^ ^ n

n«?pn

nw?pn

^«SDi7

^ s a n DOWS9H

w ^ E n

HOPHAL. sân

n s ? a n

rw$?n

ntxsnri

v n w ^ n

siMS^n

Dn«85!i

% « 8 P i i

HITHPAEL N ? w n

nw-^nnn

ns-?Dnn

n«5?Dnn

v^sgBOn JiN-mnn

Dn«8©on

SOHSBOH

hfb VERBS. 145

Future:-KAL.

N2P1 wspn

w?Ptf

t : • : : •

N^Ptf

nMset

njKSPtf JiNspn

n j s^pn

H^P?

NIPHAL.

NSfc1*

NSEn

HZTpn

^¥7*>n

NÊtf

W2W

nass^ri •issEn

njws^n

NS93

PIEL.

NSW

sspn N ? n p

N * ? P J ?

HBBN

•^•?^>:

njHaw-i •isapn

rraw^Mi

M8W

PUAL. NSE^

«B»n «-^Dn

^ p n

M2BH

JIMSE1*

naNsnn ^sspn

njMSoî

«¥*??

HIPHIL.

^ ? P ! K^pn

s>2pri

^ ? P £ )

b^SPN

•IN^tt^

rrussEn •is^pn

n j s^pn

H^W

HOPHAL.

NSE*

ssEn sssn

>s?pri

N S E K

•1M?^

np«^prn •is^pn

mNSEJn

S?P2

HITHPAEL.

HS&W s-?pnn

Ns&nj? ^s&pnri

«8eriM •is?pn>

n^p/pn •is-HDnn

n ^ p c i n

S8W5

Imperative:— KAL.

N2E

^?P !|NSP

TON^P

! NIPHAL.

«??n ^ B H

: IT •

j njNîan

PIEL.

N S »

^•?P ^ P

m s s p

HIPHIL.

w?pn >s^pn

^ S ? n

rraHsen

HITHPAEL.

Nuprin ^ p c i n

•^?pnn m s ^ p o n

Infinitive:— KAL.

Abs. NiS*?

Const. S^P

NIPHAL. PIEL. N^P

HIPHIL.

s^pn s^pn

HITHPAEL.

NBiann

Participle :-KAL. NIPHAL.

NSp;j PIEL. PUAL. HIPHIL

N>2PP HOPHAL HITHPAEL.

sspriE

1 2 6 . Notes:—(1) Some verbs N l have H-f as the last vowel of Perfect Kal, thus: N^D to be full 0 ^ 9 , DtfNbp, etc.), NPTO /0

fo unclean. (2) Kal Future with Accusative suffixes does not contract, as

vjtfSpi (not ^mW). (3) Some verbs take a D in Infinitive Kal, thus: n « ? P , nwif?. (4) The Hophal Perfect is a!so «??<! ; Future N?P:.

L


EXERCISE 35. A.

1. Write out the whole of the Hiphil of XEOPl.

2. Give the Imperatives Kal, Niphal and Hithpael of X7p and *nj3.

B.

njjan sj-np^n nnp) ô^pub ^ Vis?? a?j339 nbsb inb s5 \ n ^ n bw-iEtp-btf b-istp -iipri»i 3. n«3n31 n/iEQ J-Ptfyi

nfcri*! 6. n r ^ o nj# ib nsb$ i s bs|^ sb DSI 5.. niiN' 91? 7 "!?8 nerim 7. V?H?? a>4 'WiN n « ^ n n;bw b# nsns •-P8 H. Yw b _w nnn 5 snip bT]snp >ESO <b msnpn-bw .aass tfiji 9. Vnpbn sb D^bsan n.qs ^M»e? **b npsn

..V^si 'waftn n#i#) 'n ^s?") io. irvD^B siparn isb£

0. 1. When thou goest to-day from me ( = from with me),

(and) thou shalt find two men by ( = with) the grave of Rachel, and they will say unto thee* "The she-asses are found which thou hast gone to seek." 2. And the days of his mourning passed, and Joseph spake unto the house of Pharaoh, saying, If, I pray you, I have found grace in your eyes> speak, I pray you, in the ears of Pharaoh, saying. 3. Only the sins of Jeroboam, the son of Nebat who caused Israel to sin, Jehu turned not from following ( = from after) them. 4. And she dwelt in the midst of Israel unto this day, for she had hidden (fcOfi, V.) the messengers whom Joshua had sent to spy out Jericho. 5. May the Lord give thee according to thy heart, and

rfb VERBS. 147

fulfil (Fut.) all thy counsel. 6. Now ye have consecrated yourselves ( = have filled your hands) unto the Lord, come near.

127. B . — Q u i e s c e n t V e r b s (continued).

V. With n as the third Radical, H 7, e. g. p] /3 to reveal.

The irregularities of H"7 Verbs are as follows :—

(a) H—.—In all the Perfect forms the H is preceded by the vowel

y»g, as nb|, rrbsa. (6) H—.—In all Future forms, the n has the vowel thus

(c) H—.—In all Imperative forms, the H has the vowel .X, thus

nb, nb|n. (d) Hi.—Except in Hiphil and Hophal which have ^.X, all

Infinitives Absolute take D ffi, thus I. rib|, H . r fap , I I I . rfb§.

(e) ^ . — A l l Infinitives Construct, end in i"Yl, thus nib?, nib|n. (/*) Before the heavy pronominal suffixes, i.e. those beginning

with 3 and i l , the H disappears and ^ takes its place ; thus, O ' l instead of (This form, according to the regular verb, should

but the ** prefers the vowel P^n in front of it, hence 0 ' ! ) • So also QJTv>3 instead of O f i ? ^ , n j ^ j r i instead of nj i^JJ- l .

(g) In the 3rd Person Fern. Sing. Perfects, the radical H is changed into a H in order to prevent two H coming together, thus

instead of (Ji) Observe that in front of a 2, in the Futures and Imperatives,

the vowel is always VlJD, thus n j ^ J - l , H J ^ n .

(i) There is a form of the shortened or apocopated Future, used in the Jussive, and with the *! Conversive, and formed by dropping the ending H—? changing into bj*i, nb?n into bv?l and he went up, n j 5 ^ into 19s!! and he turned; U2V1 (Jussive) let him make, but, n^?55 he will make.

L 2


PI" 7 Verbs.

Perfect : KAL.

n b | nnb? n4| /rba

• T

vrba

on^bi

wba

NIPHAL.

nb>5? nnba?

n^bar: ^Tbaa

• 33 OJ^ba 10^33 wbaa

PIEL.

nba nnba

(n^bs) /rba rvb-i

(vrb-i) vr»bs sib?

Dirba l ^ba ^b?

PUAL.

nb | nnb? mba

T " ••.

mb? >mba

nba

DOÎ 10^3 5)3^?

HIPHIL. nb^n

nnb>3n j-rbnn

T •• : •

mbsrr vrban

••iban QiTb?n l A ^ n wban

HOPHAL. nb^n

nnb3n n ^ n ns^?,7

vrb3rr • ^ n

DC^?<7 Wban ^bnn

Future:— KAL.

nbai nb?n nb^n

''ban nbn«

^ 3 > rry^wi

bsfl n j ^ n

nba?

NIPHAL. nb|p

nbsn nb?n >b?n nbas

*r. ra^b?^

•ib?n n^b?n

nbp

PIEL. nV^ s nbjfl

nbatf 4 i P nba« A*

rg^tfi batf

nrpbatf nbaa

PUAL.

nb^:

nbw nbyn >b^ nbas

* $ n ^ b ^

totf nrb?rn

nV??

HIPHIL.

nb;p nb?n nb^n ^?3n nbas •Vw

nj^M •ibjn

n^ban nbaa

HOPHAL.

nbjj nbjn nban ^ n nbas ^ :

nybjjj sibji?

njibjri nbaa

HITHPAEL.

nbann nribiorr n^bnon niacin

^/rbaon •ibinn

•rvbinn

^bann

HITHPAEL.

nbsni nbacin nbaon 4acin nbaotf

na>bann •ibacin

na^baon nbana

Inoperative :— KAL.

nba >ba

•• sib?

rtrba

NIPHAL.

''bin ?ib|n

na*>b?n

PIEL.

nbs

Mbi

na^ba

HIPHIL.

nb^n 'ban ^ban

nj^b^n

HITHPAEL. nbacin

sibaon na*>bann

rfb VERBS. 149

Infinitive:— KAL.

Abs. rib? Const, nibs

NIPHAL.

rib}? niban

PIEL.

nba, ribs nibs

PUAL.

nibs

HIPHIL.

nb?n niban

HOPHAL.

nb?n niban

HITHPAEL.

nibann

Participle:— KAL.

nba,* ^b|t NIPHAL. PIEL.

nb?5j nb?^§ PUAL.

nb D HIPHIL.

rhyo HOPHAL. HITHPAEL.

nban^

128. Notes:—(1) When an Accusative suffix is added to a form ending

in H, this n is dropped. Thus : **39S answer me, instead of ^3/125; he will bring them up, instead of The forms of the

Future with Accusative suffixes are: I . ^ J ! ; I I I . ^•?r . ; ,V. N ^ .

(2) Rare Infinitive Construct forms: n k j or * S , for f l l f e j ; niq for nVri; in# for nin^.

(3) The following shortened forms of the Future, "being of frequent occurrence, should be learnt by heart:—

Kal: n ? ? to weep, ^ ? . 1 (for '"©5*1). HD? to build, p « .

rnî fo £e « /-z/, ~irrn (for nnn?i) Hpn to encamp, ?n?5. nbr bsn (both in Kal and Hiphil). Hp^ to answer, )¥*}<

n b s to make, do, » » « . HSn to 5 e e , H^V}, *q*0, wn?. Jussive.

Niphal: HPTE fo &/0* o ^ , HEn (for nnEt f ) .

P i c / : HD? to cover, Dp^ (for n©5^) .

H ^ to command, y$V\.

* rhi {/.), o^ i , nfei. t n ^ | , o^f , rrt^|, t nbjj, D^D, m^n. § n^D ? Dâp, HI^P. The other Participles change similarly.


Hiphil: n y i to be much, ^H?.!. nfjttf to water, ptp*l {see below, Note 6).

Hithpael: b|CT» for nV>3tf\

(4) Imperatives, following the example of the Future, have also shortened forms. Such are—

Piel: y& command, for H ^ ; 731 for n b 2 .

Hiphil: ^ I H multiply, for Hlsnn; ^ | in / ^ alone, for HQ")?! ; 6rm<7 up, for

*"*?"} (5) The Verb n y j ^ 6e much, increase, has three forms of the Infinitive HiphiL Fl^yi, used as an Adverb, much; rVSlJl, used as Infin. Absolute, as in *"f|nN n2T]rT I will surely multiply; iliSTin, used as Infin. Construct.

TiriW (6) The Verb HHtt? to drink, takes the Verb njjtj? for its Hiphil forms. nf}t?7n he caused to drink, watered; HjJtJP (P?fcl), HptpE.

nr^tt? (7) The Verb nritt? fo iow, has the following peculiar forms :—

Hithpael Perfect: Hiqpltpn ( = nnQPltprr. The radical n has become a 1, and no change has taken place in the vowel before the n). n ^ D n t p n ( = JTÔSt fn ) , VTlDElfrT, -Tiqatftt,

Future: n jOSt^ . (shortened into *nfltp>V), n £ J 0 # f l (Sin0#fl),

mnn$s, nirjntjK, Tiqntfi-i, nyjqstffl, njqetjfc?. Imperative: 71)n F\W71 y ^HFltpTl. Infinitive: n i q n t p n .

Participle: niq/ntpE.

(8) Note that the forms nV$P_ and n ^ S ! are the same in the Kal and Hiphil.

(9) The Verbs Hjn to be, and Hjn fo /we, are to be found among the Doubly Irregular Verbs, §§ 129, 130, pp. 152, 153.

rfb VERBS. 151

EXERCISE 36.

A. Parse and translate:—

•wsri 5. vr»ja-i 4. "Oib?5 3. VT«E? 2. ^jpws? 1. .W!?l 10. D ^ ? 0 9 9. nj^jnrntp™ 8." N"icn*7. flK 6.

B.

1. Write out the whole of the Kal of HJy.

2. Give the whole of the Piel and Pual of PlJX.

3. Write out the Hiphil of HiO.

C. ni»vg snii ar 2. -fQW-iri -ircw vnisb??') vrnVbj -insaJ?! l. vj5 byr? ngjg *pv nte^y-nsi 3. m n wsn niatp son»ay spsi nap -itpg nVus?n n&bp? Dr>t??2 snnij D H M bsn^. 1?^"bs 'n-btf n?j*i Y«e ng?ab "in*!! 4. Ttarj 3? ^SO ir is HEE? ^ b h nbsb i ^ s Tjbp i??i 5. Dnrop-b^ rr ba^ 6. Dtp so??.') b?.1 Qip9 Errban nw$ Dâqsnp •nj5 npbtt; isrirn iTTl? nsa+ TT ?ysibn-n« si^_ osbn 'ys-ny n ^ rib1! D^D-ID ib n^rri ^b p-i 7. vsrf? ^nntcfy Tjî /rotrh roDi nsrrn 8. D-ID nisnn 7mb nonsa nvn-n«

: : - : : : - : : > : - T : ' - ' • : - I - - . T ; - : • T T vt

bb^b inib? *rv tth«b ^ w i - b ^ pan nTTTl yhv ijtnbab rib'OWB aan b*nttr» nbs ni«ns 'n nas nb pb 9. nint&bi

T . - . _ . . . v . . T . . . . ... T . _ T [ . . T *s. : • :

i3?-n« " i ^ r n 10. nayb D^pprn rrasb n-jn D^n-ny .D^pnb TT v^yj ^nn nwvb nsnn E?n;n pisn ttfss

D. 1. And David commanded (to) all the princes of Israel

to help Solomon, his son. 2. And they wept until OBW IS?) there was no power in them to weep. 3. And he said unto him, Behold I will make§ thee fruitful and will multiply thee, and I will give thee for a company of

* See § 128 (3). f n * ° V- t See P- 137> 5- § U s e Participle.


nations. 4. To see thy face I had not expected; and behold God has shown me also thy seed. 5. And they burnt incense there on all the high places, like the nations whom the Lord had exiled from before them, and they did evil things to provoke to anger the Lord. 6. And Hannah answered and she said, Nay, my lord, a woman heavy of spirit am I, and wine and strong drink I have not drunk, but I have poured out my soul before the Lord. 7. And I will cut off thy idols and thy standing-images from the midst of thee, and thou shalt not bow down any more to the work of thy hands. 8. And the anger of Balak was kindled against Balaam, and he clapped his hands, and Balak said unto Balaam, To curse my enemies I called thee, and behold thou hast certainly blessed these three times. 9. And she fell upon her face and she bowed towards the ground and said unto him, Why have I found grace in thy eyes to recognise me, and I am a stranger.

CHAPTER XV.

129. D o u b l y Irregular Verbs .

The two principal are ; —

1. IT Pi to be, become, to come to pass (PV 7 Verb).

Kal, Perfect: r if t , HJVP1, JVft, JVVl, TPPI, VPl, DJVft,

DOUBLY IRREGULAR VERBS. 153

Future: Sing., JTPP, STPtfl, -P1.V1FI, *Plfi, prPlK; Plural,

vn\ nj nn win, n m : |- T v : |- : |- ' v : r

Shortened forms: VV, Vtfl, TIN. Observe TP1 (1 non-Conversive); TT1; pausal T]*V

Imperative : IT!!, \TI, VPl.

Infinitive: n \ l and Vll abs.; fiVPl const.

Participle: plTl, PlTTl ( / )

Niphal, fo become, to be made of PlTlJ, PlfiTl}.

N.B.— When forms commencing with a /fa5 *)tpn have the prefixes 3, 3» ' or 1, these prefixes take the vowel P*yn and the first radical (H) has a sounding N}5p instead of a ^ P . Thus : 0^^^^^. (and not E O ^ m ) , ^ i ^ ? l , Hi^nl?, *Vh the exception is n?.ni'(/wj»er.).

Note.—HPtfE (and not niyTO) (see § 111, p. 119, for the dropping of the Dogesh without lengthening the vowel).

130.

2. PlTl to live (n//L> Verb).

Kal, P e r / ^ ; JiTl, PinTl, JVTl, Wl, DIVTA, M*n. T T ' T ; |T T • T T V ' I |«

. F t e r e ; HTP,"iVPlfi, V™?* PlTlK, N T , P U ^ f i :

Shortened forms: TP (TW; pausal *?T1), ^Plfi.

Imperative: PITH, Wl, VHV . . : „ . _ :|. Infinitive : JTfi or VH absol.; nVH (nVfH) const.

Piel, (to permit to lice, cause to live), Perfect: Pl*H, JVffl/

vn, DJTTI. J t o r e : f lW, iTPU-l, HJPItJ, WT, W W l , ^rifl.

Imperative: PPH ( ^ H mwse we to &W).


Infinitive: fiV const. Participle: n*lllb.

mv\*\, Perfect: irnn, nvnn, w^nn, Drrnn. Imperative: iTll!l, Villi.

Infinitive: Hi

For the Future and Participle, the PiW forms are used.

Notes.—(1) There is a Verb ^ n to live (of the class V"V) which is very similar to Hjn. The chief forms of Îtf are: Kal, Perfect ^n Ae Zwes, with 1 Conv. ^H} (pausal CH) sometimes ^fT].

(2) Be careful not to confuse the Adjective (used frequently as a Noun) ^n living, with the verb forms.

(3) The rules of the Prefixes 1, ^, 3 and v are the same for the Verb n;n as for n;n.

131. Verbs that partake of the irregularities of two classes.

A.—Any Irregular Verb that has one of its radicals a Guttural, assumes the peculiarities of the Guttural Verbs in addition to the irregularities of its class.

Examples:—JJJ13 to touch; Kal, Inf. Abs.y yiJJ; Inf. Constr.,

T\n; Hiphil, y\a!l, »•$&; Q"S and h Guttural).

y T to know; Kal, Part., y f ; Jw/ Con**., J i n ; Niphal,

Fut., JflV (instead of SPIV); (V'S and *? Guttural).

H« to r<?«*; Hiphil, ITJPt * IT3& (Y'JJ and S Guttural).

nSy *o <7<> up; Kal, frSfi!, nSs?; Niphal, rh$\ (PI'S and S

Guttural).

* Also MP!; Future TO! (n3»1) ; IT3D.


132. B. (a) J"S and N"S Verbs.

1. K33. The Kal forms are not used. The Niphal forms

are translated to prophesy, to speak as a prophet.

Niphal Perfect: N | 3 , n X M ; Future N } ^ ; Infin. N23nS,

Hithpael Perfect: K |Jnn , *nN33n (== 'HN^nn, see § 94,4, c,

p. 105); Future, K3J1V ; Participle, tiSSFp (N33p).

2. X&) to carry, bear. Kal Perfect, nXE>3, 1KBO; Future,

KB'*, 'IKE" and W&fi. (In these two forms, the Dogesh is

always omitted.) Imperative, bt&, *NE?; Infin. Abs., KJ?3;

Infinitive Const, nNG? (HNB'S); Participle, NEn}; JVqpfcrf

Perfect, am; Future, Kfe^»; Hiphil Perfect, I K ^ n .

133. (b) J"S and H"1?.

1. ntDi o stretch out, incline. Kal Perfect, Tl*t33, ^ 3 ; all T T ' • T ' T '

other forms, except Future, like PI' S v e r b ; Future, p«9* (B?1),

On (shortened from HtSFl); JVtpAfl/, Perfect, *JVfcM, VIM;

F u t u r e , ^ . ; Participle, Pit?}; JBi]pAt7, Perfect, PlOPI, ^ t e H ;

Future, HO! (fc»l), PlOtt (DW); Imperative, HtSH (BPI);

Infinitive, HitSH; Participle, PltDlb.

2. PpJ fo strike {Kal not used); Niphal (rare). PI33 ; Pwffi

(rare), JI3J; chiefly used in Hiphil; Perfect, P13P1, rV3!l, DJV3P1;

Future, H3! 0[»1), P13X, EM; Imperat., ^H; Infin., iTGPl

Participle, n 3 £ ; Hophal Perfect, PI3PI, W ^ n ; Future, )y ;

Participle, H3p.


3. nDj to try (only used in the Piel); Perfect, HDJ, W S } ;

Future, HIM*; Infinitive, n i M ; Participle, HMD.

4. i lpj to be innocent (the Kal is not used); Niphal, Perfect,

PIJ9J , PlJlM, WI53 ; Future, n ^ ; J%/ (fo declare innocent) ;

Perfect, HJ33; Future, njM*.

For K"S and H'S Verbs, see § 120b, Note, p. 133. ;

EXERCISE 37.


VTB5! 5. ^ 3 .4, 1T1371 3. . D'S^n 2. ^nJT] 1. ^T?n io. nn;^3-9. warn. 8. .nsw 7. vriDjib 6.

.npnvn^ 11.

B. sb asi nsrr 7153 sy? sb 7? rms^ s n nstonn tztean u "pbr 5tthn nrp i i njnn vby |7»i5n npis 7571 7*153 M"91 V3 nisb ni^nb anb ^rira ^ninaarns "DJI 2. n>n^ ^3?"bs saan DIS 73 3. ato'ina TT- g 3 nsnb Drn?^ 7r$b 4. 'n -151 ro?# oabp ^3?b rn$si D saan bsni^ o^nbsb D 'Tf? ao^ni \ni?p-b|-ntf 00^51 'HSW naisb Di> DV D^|ns YIW^S Q£H^ n ^ Q>p;n ngpsa 5. \ns?nn-ris onyTj nattf D ^ S I S Dp^cibis-ns WJ? TOtpb ai> anb ijpton 7. Dbi ^nns -is&arn oâfrri any?? -isip 6. Drib nnb *FI;TIH nstpa na?t? n w ^ 1 n^lV (^ ™<0 ^ V Dtp totp*i 9. nsy nba$ rrarn n^ntfj ^ s SEW sws) 8, Nn _ 10. ; Vhj ^33 rawi °bip swip?} D nb n \agb nn^rr *T9 î??? TJI 3tt?ii pbD^n-n^ nisns n$ in*) b-istp nte nq« sj-tyrT ->£s*i rr-btf si^bs bbgo?l ^btf ^TI?.I 11. D?J# D ^ D?*I 12. sorbs -i3i? D "515©3 Djy D^1?.?©3 n-to ian-ritf


D btf -vn?i D^y ntinq bp bbfi?i QD^ll p-nna stpirn nten ^b^b rii« I?BV'n D#}1 13. niynny D^sn bp ar^ ^ n£7 Q W n7^J7 D^ -inbBto 14. issb b | hnfc »3; ^pv-n# Qfr?m: ob -)b«b nni« -V)?n Vnn 1339 'n 0N5 ^ ?T I« 3 15. *i&rn crâm rnn ?b lyb? TJS Dtp ^yYisppp -i#8 n isn bp? nb? n(p£tf ^ Tj^pinb rnm 16. *jip* sb n,^. &§?ftpb *p;-n5,!l nbp rrfrs^ wb Tyn's Q rfbs ^.ps npbb nnin^ -irpn^m soar} ttswn ntes Di>2 D?9»B ^ . r r 17. cnb ninnttfnb-i D7351? nnn«

.v>;pb njnsi -WP? ^sbi#n

C. All forms of the Verb TO BE are fo 60 translated by fTPl-

1. And Jacob arose and he lifted up his sons and his wives upon the camels. 2. And the food shall be for a store to the land for the seven years of the famine which shall be in the land of Egypt. 3. I will be to him for a father and he shall be to me for a son; when he doeth iniquity then ( = and) I will reprove him with the rod of men, and with the strokes of the sons of men. 4. After he has been sold, there shall be redemption for him ; one of his brethren shall redeem him. 5. Hear ye me, Asa and all Judah and Benjamin: the Lord is with you when you are with him ; and if ye will seek him he will be found by ( = to) you, and if ye forsake him, he will forsake you. 6. For there shall surely come to pass (== be) the thing that he proclaimed ( = called) in the name of the Lord against the altar which is in Bethel and against the houses of the high places which are in the cities of Samaria. 7. May the Lord be with us as he was with our fathers; may he not leave us, nor forsake us. 8. And


Saul said unto David, " Behold my eldest daughter Merab, her will I give to thee for a wife; but be to me valiant, and fight the Lord's battles " : for (== and) Saul said (Per/.) Let not my hand be against him, but let the hand of the Philistines be against him. 9. And the women who were playing answered and said, " Saul has slain ( = smitten) his thousands (with prefix 2) and David his ten thousands" (with 1). 10. And David put forth (== sent) his hand into the bag, and he took thence a stone and he slung [it], and he smote the Philistine in ( = into) his forehead, and the stone sank into his forehead and he fell upon his face to the ground. 11. And now lift up a dirge for the princes of Israel. 12. With (the) interest be gave, and with (the) increase he took: and shall he live ? He shall not live: he hath done all these abominations, he shall surely die: his blood (Plur.) shall be upon him.

CHAPTER XVI.

133a. D o u b l y I r r e g u l a r Verbs—(continued).

C. ''"SandK'V.

1. Wt\ to go out: Kal Perfect W£\, *PNX\', Future XT,

n3KXJ3; Imperative XX, niPNX; Inf. Abs. XV, Const. nXS ;

Participle XXV, (/.) PIKXV or nXXi\

BxôSL Perfect X*XP, rttWlPl; Future fcTXV (KXV1); Impera

tive X^lH; Infinitive N ^ P I ; Participle KVtflb.

Hophal Perfect WftT\; Participle fcWlft, ( / ) T\VC$fo.


2. ay to fear: Kal Perfect $y9 *11K*V; Future tn",

« 7 f t , « 7 K , P l ^ f l , W ] " ; Imperative xy, )Hy; Inf. Abs.

tir\\; Const, myf?. 'Nij>ha\ Ikture JTfifi; Participle K i l l

134.

i^.-S.—Avoid confusing N*V with Plfcjn to see, the forms of

these verbs being somewhat similar.

of nan: Kai jtaw* n*rv, *n*i, •ann, Nnw, ^ 7 1 . * Of « 7 T : Kal Rifare « 7 % j n ^ (or «*)»!), WTfi , « 7 « J ,

^ 7 * 1 or Wl 'V*

Of H « 7 « n f i , n^Nnpl; ^ 7 (Kal i ^ r e ) .

Of « 7 T : J|K7Pl,n3M7J?; ^ 7 (Kal Perfect).

135.

D. *"S and n,/k7.

1. rn^ fo praise (used only in Hiphil; and in Hithpael in

the sense of to confess).

Hiphil Perfect nTin, VT1ft, WHttl; Future !"HV ; Imperative

yfh; Infinitive nVfln?; Participle 11*110.

Hithpael P*r/fectf n^lJlH; -FWwe rTllflV

2. n*V to £Arow (used in Kal and Hiphil, but in the Hiphil

it more often means to teach).

* The context alone can decide which verb is meant by these forms, which

are precisely alike.


Kal Perfect m \ W T ; Future 7T\", rVVJ; Imperative JTV; .TT; ' ,T . T ' T ' . ••:

Infinitive 7T\\, HI r ? ; Participle THY.

Niphal Future ppl**.

Hiphil P ^ c t f n-JIH, ^nniH; Future ,TlV; Imperative PHin

03*11!"! tocA me); Infinitive Participle ITllO.

136.

E. V'y and H"b.

Ni3 fo come : Kal Perfect N3, HN3, DN3, DN3, TlN3, 1N3; ^ T T T ' T T ' T • T T '

QnN3, UN3; Jbtorc N 3 \ N13N, 1Ni3\ n3Ni3R Ni33; V T ' T 7 T T T T T T

Imperative fc{3, ^ 3 , INS; Infinitive JOS (/IN3); Participle

K3, HN3, DW3, friN3.

Hiphil, to Jn'wgr, ca«se to come: Perfect N*3n, nNân,

nxan, n*an, ^wan. w a n , DnNaq, OKW-

[Before Accusative Suffixes the following forms are used:—

From N*3n; ^N*3n he brought me; W 3 n .

FromnN3n = r\N*3ri; un*03n, Dnfc*an. From *n«an = *rtt«*an; vnfc*3n, irnân. From W i n ; D W 3 n : from «*$? !=W*Wn; DUN*3q.]

Future W3* (N3»l), N*3N, W>y, nJW31jl; Imperative

Nan (with n - nxon), w a n , W3n ; /«/. 4*«. xan; Cowst N*ani7 ( D N ^ 1 ? ) ; Participle W 3 £ , DW3&.

Hophal Per/*rf KaVl, TWjn, n«aVT, 1 X 3 ^ ; JWnre N3V;

Participle Na^D


EXERCISE 38.


snn 5. Djavjn? 4. w^?! 3. ° 0 ^ n 2. rq.ia 1. DJ/^NSS 10. n«si*rri 9. «?^n 8. -wi?l 7. ^«T^ 6. ^ i V i 4 . ^rnin 13. w s i n i 12. na^n-i n j ^ 11. •^sn . 19. T*TTM 18. nYTirfp-i 17. "nto 16. w j l 15.

.^shni 20.

rnwp iH793i JOPIN .nays "lysrn ^ns T ^ P ^ ^ 5 nnv) 1. N1P*1 V»by Q,*3?W ^ P9SOnb *1P?* ^ «b! 2. WM5 vrr$-b$ ?ipi> y-nnns ifltf ^ ôy ribi bss ar*tf b? -isîn -n« 205© sifry nrit TTO"1^ ibg *iPY*"b« rhng n£N»i 3. n^-n riinsb im *)pv wh*i 4. l?a? nr i s -i«h tob-i B ? T ? ?

Darn jyj? Ylâ -IMJI n^b -ltjtoj-byi nn\nt\ ajtfsi ^nsi: ^ s V1B5 ^b nnt?hb HEE? wn nns nwx vi«n >s 5. 10 Y"""tf? n p rT') Tjj-]rn^ yn?n ntt?N Q^p D0«^ : " ^ win nn?D ia Q^nbw 'n norr; ")$*$ nipapn njrn 6. p-w 733 ibri? nDOS n-is? ^?is nt£7s: b?-n$ n^?n HEE? Dtp to?f ]3ttfb a^Tn nn?p bb'j 097; nonry\ njyywyo EÔWI Qîjbto nsTOn-b^ Dtf*38l DH?^ O?0 a^siwj 7. 'nb r ^ n ngjs -by ani« «^n vibpfr ^?7B2 nnb nj viNEa â Dai «. nisnsn bsb « n ^ns rcnTi nbn nnt ^nna ntrs vnNn

T -. T T ; • • ; - : T T - T • - T V -: » v T T

V"?sn-bs bvrwt rms-b^ D?O$ V50S 'n *>a$ >? any Tl 9. nv&-b$ tpbn 10. Dyflinyb nns nnb ^-rnj viNqft nttfs:

n i ^ ^ n nns-btf 'n JTS anisnni Dniw £H275 ta^pnn M


vriion v\n*rij? ?is v rn^ >a$ >a$ n . ?vT nnis n^ptpni >a$ b$iipi ^np np?p_ nttn *&vn bs 12. isrn irbsni. ^s ?i^y ^ s-prrbs 13. bsn^ aJtrjp Tyburn 'n QS? TJ-nffi *p/-i;piDfi n« TSHn? Htf T ^ f t s T#b$ ^ s2 2tftpn-bs risp' *\ipv rrhjT] -wiin D nbig ?f? ^nin u . 'pis r ^ S "»a ^9tp-n$ ntrinV ^92 "iSP^P nsîn 15. TtfiHbiM 'n ^lis s inn ni>2 n 7 «i: 16. ^V ^ 3 0 ^ CI TTC ••n -pi ai*n bj abbn n^ribss 17. ^Btnrfi ?T9S nfef; •»? rn?as •*:*> *[;P Tx] HI ^^" n ^ Pnw ^01. is. nbp rryia ab'^b Êah bsnt^ vj? nbii? b?-n$ i>b2 n-r-inni >nn T*y ran trsn bs nbtpi n^ran ras-i bp ans 70?! on^rr b?b c^y tfg b|-n^ :

nittpp m"«5 ^srw T n ' n ^lin 19. nna'iftn ^ny tir>s T3

C. 1. Confess ye your sins this day. 2. Before she came.

3. Let us go before him. 4. Behold we will praise. 5. And he taught them. 6. She will go out. 7. Do ye not fear. 8. He will be feared. 9. He brought me. 10. When he came.

D. 1. And he arose and he went to Zarephath, and he

came unto the gate of the city, and behold ! there was a widow woman gathering sticks, and he called unto her, and he said, " Fetch, I pray thee, for me a little water in the vessel that ( = and) I may drink." 2. And Elijah said unto her, " Fear not ; go, do according to thy word : but make for me thence a little cake first ( i l ^ N ^ S ) and

* 'Pzsziip; $ee§ 14, p. 12.

DOUBLY IRREGULAR --.VERBS;- 1 0 3

bring it out to me; and for thyself and thy son, thou shalt make afterwards." 3. When the heavens are closed, and there be no rain, for they will have sinned against thee, and they (will) pray towards this place, and will acknowledge thy name and turn from their sin, because thou wilt answer them. 4. And all the congregation brought him forth until without the ( = unto from without to the) camp, and they stoned him with stones and he died, as the Lord had commanded Moses. 5. And the children of Israel said unto them, " Would that we had died* by the hand of the Lord in the land of Egypt, when we sat by the pot of the flesh, when we did eat bread to the full• for ye have brought us forth into this wilderness to kill this congregation with (the) famine." 6. I t is good to give thanks unto the Lord and to sing praises to thy name, O Most High ! 7. And the priests were standing according to (hv) their offices: and the Levites with instruments for (=of) the song of the Lord, which David, the king, had made to give thanks unto the Lord, for his mercy [endureth] for ever, when David praised through them ( = in their hand). 8. I will give thanks unto the Lord with all my heart : let me declare all thy marvellous works. 9. I will acknowledge thee among the nations, O Lord ! I will sing praises to thee among the peoples. 10. And they stood up in their place ( = upon their standing [Inf.]), and they read in the book of the law of the Lord their God a fourth part of the day; and a fourth part they were confessing and worshipping unto the Lord their God.

•* = our dying, Infin. Const.

M 2


CHAPTER XVII.

137. Hebrew Poetry.

The poetical books of the Bible are:—

The Latter Prophets, Psalms, Proverbs, Job, Song of Songs, and Lamentations. Poetical passages occur in many of the other books. In the Pentateuch there are the following:—

Genesis iv. 23, 24 ; ix. 25-27 ; xxvii. 28, 29, 39, 40; xlix. 1-27. Exodus xv. 1-18, 21. Numbers vi. 24-26; xxi. 17, 18, 27-30; xxiii. 7-10, 18-24; xxiv. 3-9, 15-24. Deuteronomy xxxii., xxxiii.

138.

Hebrew poetry possesses neither rhyme nor metre. Its chief characteristic is a peculiar construction of sentences called parallelism. This consists in expressing the same idea twice in different language, either in one verse or in two succeeding verses. The ideas are then said to be parallel to each other. Example:—

: *3&to f J^na ywoh niK ny " How long\ 0 Lord! wilt thou forget me for ever? How long wilt thou hide thy face from me ?"

(Psalm xiii. 2.)

This form is called synonymous parallelism^ as the ideas ex-

HEBREW POETRY. 1()5

pressed in the two halves of the verse practically coincide. When the ideas are contrasted with each other, it is called antithetical parallelism. Thus :—

DJ51 p*W b& yiW *3

" For a righteous man falleth seven times and riseth again, But the wicked are overthrown by calamity?*

(Proverbs xxiv. 16.)

" Scornful men set a city in flame, But wise men turn away wrath"

(Proverbs xxix. 8.)

An example of parallelism in succeeding verses is : —

: PP ^ o nBDtji wm ^ n«5N KS

u I shall not die, but live, and declare the works of the Lord; The Lord hath chastened me sore, but he hath not given me over

to death!' (Psalm cxviii. 17, 18.)

189, There are certain other usages that distinguish poetry from prose. . ,

1. The use of words seldom or never employed in prose.


Examples:— tPiJX mftn, for D*"TX; ft'liipath, for ^ H - ; n ? £

wordy for "D^J; HHNI ft) tt»tt£, for X13.

2. The use of special forms, such as *hv. for ^ ; ^ K for

^ t ; H 8 f o r i » ; '30 for}».

3. The Construct form of Nouns sometimes ends in *— or

'). Examples:—iihtt *33 (for |3) Aw. ss's ^ . (Gen . -x l ix . 11);

DW â.'TCfor ft!*)) full of people (Lamentations i. I ) ; n ty? 133

M* sow o/ Beor (Numb. xxiv. 3).

4. The Construct form is used even in front of Prepositions,

TVp?5 nn2?£? joy in the harvest (Isaiah ix. 2).

5. The frequent omission of the Definite Article, the Rela

tive Pronoun, and HNt as sign of the Accusative.

6. One of the Accusative Pronominal Suffixes is ifi for V-or

• or DH; Sib to him or to them, for .y? or QH7; iDS)/?^ w^

mallow them up, for DyS^n (Ex. xv. 12).

7. Participles end in *— (especially before Prepositions).

Thus: }*&n ^]V leaving the flock (Zee. xi. 17); \%h *1DK

binding to the vine (for IDX) (Gen. xlix. 11).

8. The Jussive Future form is used in the ordinary Future

sense, D3^&5 D^jy ^T"!- he will guide the meek in judgment

(Psalm xxv. 9); T p T for *!pT!!-

TABLE OF REGULAR AND IRREGULAR VERBS. 167;

140.

Perfect;—

Comparative Table of Regular and Irregular Verbs.

Guttural & » V

\ . *> YS y"y N"3 »»2

fy a"1? *"h

KAL.

^£i7

inv bss

rbw ttfelp 2D

•?5$

s » ; D»?

N^£

nb?

NIPHAL.

b^P?

"^s? V»J5

nb^3 »I3 ^0?

bjga naria Dip?

s?£? nb:?3

PIEL.

bftp

TO? bs2

nbtp

»33 nnio bsw aah

n»ip NSW nbst

PUAL.

b&n

"TSP b&

n W Q?33

nnio bss n»j

DElip M?9 nbs

HIPHIL.

Vann

^5^.0 b^ jn

rrbtpn tthjn ^P5?

b o s n sânn

QNpn «^?pn nban

v : •

HOPHAL.

b&pn

•usn bs in

nbpn tt?§n

np^n b?«n ntrftn Di?tn

S^p/l nb^n

HITHPAEL.

b^pon :

T3?On bs |on

nbntpn ttfeajpn

nninprr bsson nts^-in

o&iptfn N-?tt;prT, nbii-jn

KAL.

bbp>

ihsr bwm

nbur trip nfa^

b?s^ ^ »P:

H?91 nb?1

NIPHAL.

bttpi

W-b«sp

rbw* WW

'• T •

nsp

.. T. nip*

MS?'! nb|^.

PIEL.

bftp*;

TSi^

b«r nbtth

®$T. ^ 3 ^ 1 bgsî

2$?! Qpip1; SBB1*

nb^.

PUAL.

btep^

1222s

b ^ nbtth

aJapl nnio^ bss^ nt#"

npip'; NSEP

nby.

HIPHIL.

b^p!

T W * V w

rrbttr WW

WT ^?8! nî^

Q'iTT

S^DV

nb?>

HOPHAL.

bfcp^

I^Tr bsrp

ribtt^ t&a;

n w b^s^ nwv Dp^

NSB^

nbn> V I T

HITHPAEL

bts>po>

T3B/T bNarv

n b n ^ ttf??iT

n:rinpN. bsKni n#;rr:

DBipr"! NBBJT

nbarv!


^

Imperative:

Guttural B

y'B

K"B

*"B

)"y

KAL.

bbp

bs?

ttfe do

bb« zw

nb?

NIPHAL.

bfcpn

"nyn bs |n

rhwri t#??n

br>sn nu jn nipn

nban

PIEL

bfcp

TZ29

nbt? E>33

b5S n tp ;

DfcSp

PUAL. HIPHIL.

bttpn

bsan nbi^n

tzten son

b?wn ntpin

opn

nb?n

HOPHAL. HITHPAEL.

btaprin .

bs |on nbnpn »§3.*pn

nninprr bss.'pn na^nrr

•aipon

nbirin

Infinitive:—

Absolute Construct

Guttural B<

„ H

S " B J

KAL.

bitap bbp

Thy * S bis?

rriba? nbtp

rwa

nb bins

T

bins

NIPHAL.

bbpD b$i?n

TOSS

bs?n rribttfa nb^n

bbsm

PIEL

^ P )' b b n /

"ray)

bwsn

nbw * nbtp j

tt?33 ) tt?2D J

nnir>'

bsW

PUAL.

bbp

Vsh J

nhw i

B7213 '• (

nnio

b b « |

HIPHIL.

bnpfjnj

bs3n»

n b ^ n |

aran

b?$rn

HOPHAL.; HITHPAEL.

11 b&p^n bftpn

b«^n

nb^n

73^n |

73-irr j

br^n

) j bfcpnn

^3?on

bssrin

nbripn

tt?330n

nninpn

bssnn

JI

TABLE OF REGULAR AND IRREGULAR VERBS. 169

Infinitive (continued):

KAL.

*B \\ TV

,»{ K** j

n"b {

Dip D-p

NiSB H2D rib| nib?

NIPHAL.

2«wn

aipav Dipnj H2E3

.N?E>n

nb?? niban

PIE]L

2 » !

°?ip {

risa NB» rib? 1

nib? J

PTJAL,

nWj |

niba j

UJPHIL

hafirn rârinj

cprn

rfjjm nib?nj

HOPHAL.

nafarr

nftnn

HITHPAEL.

ntfypn

Deipon

W89TO

nb ? n | nb?on

nib? on

Participle :—

Guttural B

3"B

v"y N / ;B

*"B

«'*

KAL.

b^p , -b©p

•nay, -nis bswa, brfa

T?

mb^,nbtt> atop, afab

nnno, nnfa bras, bDs

D-ip, np

>-iba, nba

NIPHAL

btpp?

^W?3

nbtp? a?|?

.b JK3 aarb nipj

nb:o

PIEL.

bfcpp

bH2E

a*S?P

bswp 2#!P

npipp NSW rrbsE

PUAX.

b&PP

T?sp bito

T :

nbafo T \ :

BfeDB nniop bssp

Dpipp N-spp nb?E

HIPHIL.

b^PPP

"^3SP Vs?p

rrbtpp ar>?p 2pp

V*?sp rrarto D pp

s^pp nbnB

HOPHAL.

bpP£

bs?p nbtpp

np-ia b?sp

_ T ; "..

nb^D

HITHPAEL.

btepnp

b«|^9 nbn^p afeaflp

rninpp bs»op nafypp

Dpiptfp «?prip nbanp

VOCABULARY I.

H E B R E W INTO ENGLISH.

nS father (§ 55*).

*QW to perish (§ 120*).

r O S to consent (§ 120b,

note),

i n s / . stone (§ 42).

D r n ^ S Abraham.

33B Agag.

r q | S letter (§ 5Id).

1VTS lord {the plural D ^ B

is used in the sense of the singular lord, and its verb is in the singular.

n ^ S mighty.

HDiyt ground (§ 52).

~n^? Adar {month).

2HS to love.

bn'W tent (§ 50b, 3).

i s or.

V-1S perhaps.

but, however.

l i s light {pi. DVTiN and

nrris).

ms sign {pi. ninis). TS then (§ 89b).

I t* ear , / . (§ 54, 5). •

"ttS to gird.

n s brother (§ 55).

nSHS. Ahab

^ n s one (§ 64a, & 65, 4).

r i i ng sister (§ 55).

*n$ to hold, seize (§ 120b)

IDS , ^ Q S after, behind

(§ 59, 5.)

"1CW ( T ] ™ / e m . ; D'HAH)

another,

i ^ i n s end.

nVs enemy (§ 49c, B).

n>S where? (§62, 1.)

TT S, H?>S, how.

r.S not (§ 61, 3).

HD^S ephah.

nb^B where ?

t ^ S man (§ 55).

W but.

75S surely.

* The paragraphs as indicated should always be referred to. A Roman number (as III., V.) refers to the conjugation to be used.

VOCABULARY I. 171

bss -bs bs bs

D ribs

•tnjbs sorbs

*)bs n^bs

DM

HES

TOW

ins noM

v v:

H3$

:m

IS

to eat (§ 120b).

unto (§ 59, 4).

not (§ 61, 2).

God.

these (§ 19). God.

if.

Elijah.

Elisha.

thousand (§ 64c).

two thousand.

mother (§49d, B).

if.

cubit. maid-servant (§ 53, 3).

faith.

Amen ! It is true !

V., to believe. D3£S surely.

to be strong.

to say (§ 120b).

Truth.

I beseech thee.

whither.

•os, *obs i. to be angry.

to gather (§ 120a).

to bind.

Esther.

nose (§49d, A).

anger (§49d, A).

also.

nSN to bake (§ 120b, note). n§"« baker.

D?98 face. P5S to restrain.

3 3 ? $ finger,/.

nyyw four. D ^ ^ I S forty.

rns path (pi. nirns, const rrirns).

H ^ n g healing.

mK ^ n « length. 'HB, nn« Hon {Pl. nin»).

P^HS palace (pL may]**).

nyj-fcj hare.

Y l $ earth, land (pi. nfcnB co^ .n i^- )N)(§17,3) .

tPS fire,/. (§ 49d? B). nt^S woman (§ 55).

"1WM. Assyria.

^ which (§§20, 26). n $ , n s (§ 35, § 57, l ) .

J-IS, nns, o^s, i£ts (§ 18, A).

155 garment (§ 50).

bb^? on account of (§ 60, 1).

b i a V., to divide.

bn? tin. npn^ l beast, cattle (§ 53, 3).

Ni2 to come (§ 136).

ttfi^ to be ashamed (§ 124,6)

172 VOCABULARY I.

tt? to plunder (§119,

" ins to choose. n^)S to trust.

T 2 to understand (§§ 124).

713 22 understanding.

H ^ ? capital.

i T 5 house (§ 55). r o a to weep (§128 , 3).

b s not (j§ 61, 6). without.

^ b ? besides (§ 60, 2).

Dy1?? Balaam. 73 son (§ 55).

5).

123,

n-^SS for the sake of (§ 60,3).

^ 9 ? on behalf of (§ 60,

b r s Baal (the idol). 4).

lord, master (the plural

trby3 serase o / ^ e singular,

lord, #wc? i/« verfl

the singular).

^ y ? cattle. ~>9S to burn.

is in

^ p ? I I I . , to cleave, to break

forth.

->l?9 oxen. "1»J21 morning.

ttfaa 111., to seek. N"]2l to create.

nns to flee. iTH? covenant.

TO III . , to bless. TO knee, / . (dual, D?5"]3).

n ^ S shame (§ 52).

^ 5 daughter (§ 55).

^ n ? in the midst of (§ 60, 5).

maiden.

bsa to redeem (§110) .

n isa warrior (adj., mighty).

rrvnii might. f "n? | lady, mistress (§ 52).

great (great man).

*H? kid.

*H| I I I . , to blaspheme.

^2 nation (pi., D?i2t). Vria lot (/>/., rriVrfei).

b a joy. nbaba skull (§52).

Hv| to reveal ; V., to exile.

to roll away.

OS also. D3 . . . D| both

. . . . and.

b p i camel (§ 50b, 3).

to bestow kindness. 13 garden (plur., Q pa or

riiaa). ^3 stranger.

f n ? throat.

"J a threshing-floor. tth| I I I . , to drive out.

)m Goshen.

VOCABULARY I. 173

HJW^ grief (§ 51c, B).

p ^ to cleave.

i y j word (§ 49, B).

n rp jn ' n y j chronicles.

" ^ I I I . , to speak.

0737 honey.

tt fish (pZ. D ^ ) .

*OT banner (§ 50).

^ H bear.

TH David.

Tfa friend.

W ^ wax.

Tfa generation (/?/. D'n'fr

and iThiT).

^ 7 . door (§ 52).

07 blood (§ 50a, 2).

H ^ tear.

H Dan. Vhrl to seek.

n ^ law.

^ i n glory.

Nin, wn, s>n '(§ is, A). n;n to be (§ 129). ^ H hin (liquid measure).

tf?n to-go (§ 122, 3). to praise.

nan, on they (§ 18, A). ] p n Hamarh

n a n behold (§ 57, 3).

tJDn to turn (§ 109, 5).

"!n ("inn) mountain (§ 50a,

3). ^"]n to slay.

Verbs beginning with \ in Exer

cises 1 to 18.

"1£N*1 and he said.

TO ^ 1

and it came to pass.

and he begat. TT'H and he lived. Ifbjl

*sf?p*i and he went.

and he reigned. r i D ^ and he died.

fey»5 bb»i

and he made.

and he fell.

NS?.l and he went out. HJW and he took.

*rs?n and he called. NH*1 and he saw.

nbtp^ SEtpi

7Tn*5

and he sent.

and he heard

and he gave.

To change these verbs into the

feminine, see § 44, p. 38.

•vnpi Vashti.

nsV, nj (§ 19). nri* to flow. H3J to sacrifice.

c n3J sacrifice.

174 VOCABULARY I.

nrn gokl. rteti besides (§ 60, 6).

n n olive (§ 49, A).

"I?J male.

"ipj to remember.

n s y b t fierce anger.

"")£J I I I . , io sing praises.

npV] cry )P\ old (old man, elder).

V1X to sow.

Vll seed.

p1\ to sprinkle.

Hrin V., to hide.

b n n to pledge (§ 109, 4).

15*7 companion.

nn feast (§ 17a, e).

25H to celebrate a feast,

n^n to gird (§ 109, 4).

b i n to forbear, cease

(§ 109, 4). tt5"]n new. ttfl'n month. tt?in to be new; III.,to renew. to^n thread.

npin wall. . HTn to see, behold.

PJH strong.

pin to be strong.

Htpn to sin..

nmn sin. ^n liymg.(§ 130, note).

rrrt to live (§ 130). Hjn animal.

n^n life. b>n, :b ^D strength, Avealth.

1§ soldier, valiant man.

Dpn wise (wise man).

Dpn to be wise (§109, 4).

nbn milk. window.

v H illness,

nb^bn God forbid ! far be i t !

III . , to profane ; V., to

begin,

b b n slain, dead body.

to divide, to be smooth.

portion,

portion.

TTQ11 wrath.

! £ n to covet.

-liEQ Hamor (Ex. 36, C, 3).

î£>D ass.

b^n to have compassion, to

spare (§109, 4).

DJjn violence

nEfori five.

• • • TO grace.

/TOO spear (§ 53, 2).

C2n for nothing.

1?n to be gracious.

I p n loving-kindness.

~!pn deficient.

'nDn to lack (§ 109, 4).

VOCABULARY I. 175

V5?n

rn "•SO

nijn,

™, n?1CT

mn T T *n'n

nsno nttfn TT n

nnts nnip bnto

npnto T

nits WEE

abtp

to be willing, desire

(§ 94 ; § 109, 4).

arrow (§ 49d, B).

half (§68) . P'n statute (§ 49d,C).

^ n sword (pi. ninnq, const, njsntf)

destruction.

to be angry.

winter.

reproach.

to think (§ 109, 4).

darkness.

executioner, guard.

slaughter.

to dip.

ring (§ 52).

pure.

good.

to be unclean.

unclean.

J»& to hide.

]2& to load.

*1£ children. D l£ before (§ 89b).

"HM} river {especially the

Nile).

bw; y . , to consent.

>D-in> Jebusite.

bn^T V., to bring.

ttfoj to be dry.

if?* m) Jabesh Gi.lead.

."TJ ( / . ) h a n d (§ 50a, 4).

^ 7 T to acknowledge, V., to

praise, VII., to confess

(§ 135, 1).

3HJ to know (§ 131).

rrnrp judah. ^Tin> Jew.

7/nnirr^ Jonathan.

Q i v day (§ 50a, 5) (OVD,

standing by itself,

mea?is to-day).

njV dove.

~^V creator.

I ^ n . together, as one.

n^ T to be good (§121).

\)1 wine. .

HP!) I!., to argue together;

V., rebuke, prove.

bb j to be able (§ 122, 6).

to bear.

0} sea (§ 49d, A).

r ? J right hand. ni^ : ê ni> (§ 50a, 5).

*)£} to continue (§ 122, 7).

">DJ HI . , to punish.

IV) to appoint, V., testify.

V&J Jael. IP! because.

VVT to advise.

npsn Jacob.

176 VOCABU

I P ! forest. HDJ beautiful.

« ? : to go out (§ 133, 1).

S § ; to place, to stand (§ 122,

5).

a ? ; to place (§ 122, 8).

p r e ; Isaac.

*"^?1 creature.

PS; to pour out (§ 122, 5).

1 § ; to form.

m : to kindle (§ 122, 5).

*"lf precious. KTT to be afraid (§ 133, 2 ;

§ 134). 02?"}; Jeroboam.

TV to go down.

T7.1- Jordan ( = t h e descending river).

n n ; to shoot, to teach (§ 135,

2).

P"1T green. p i ; to spit. a n ; to inherit, V., to drive

ou t (§ 122, 4).

W1. there is (§ 57, 2).

naJ; to sit, dwell (§ 121).

7# ; to sleep (§ 122, 4).

2tp; to save, help.

")tp; upright.

b ^ l P ; Israel.

iBfbS when.

LARY I.

*Q2 to be heavy ; III . , to

honour (§ 94, 1). D?3 to wash.

J&9J, H ^ 5 ? lamb. H3 thus.

703 priest (/>/. D^rfS).

1*13 I I I . , to act as priest. 0 3 , ^nb strength.

nyiS star.

^3 for, because, when, that. Efc* ^3 but, except.

1 *?3 all (§ 68).

3^3 dog. rfpS to be ended; III . , to

finish. n b s destruction.

daughter-in-law, bride.

^ 5 vessel (§ 55).

HS3 how many ?

75^ 73 thus, so.

155 wing, corner (§ 52, 2).

7^55 Canaan. SD3 throne, seat. n p 3 I I [., to cover.

HADS covering, robe. ?1?5 silver.

D23 to be angry.

*13 hand or foot (hollow of

the); spoon (§ 54, 6). TD? young lion.

"123 III . , to atone. DH3 vineyard.

VOCABULARY I. 177

b p n 3 (Mount) Carmel.

3^3 to bend the knee.

rns to cut; with rrn?i, to make (a covenant) ;

see footnote to p. 90.

btt?3 to stumble {the Future

Niphal is used in

Kal sense).

D " # 3 Chaldeans.

HH3 lo write.

n j h ? coat (§ 53, 3).

~>^3 to crown, surround.

sb , vab ( ^3b ) m., heart (/?/.,

ni3b and ninn1?). ^ b alone (§ 62).

B*nb robe. ^bnb so as not to (§ 61).

EH1? to put on (clothes). W b, ^b O would that !

mb, ™., tablet (/?/. nirab). ^L? Levite, Levi.

Erf? II . , to fight (§ 94, 2).

nb^b night; nb^bn this night

to stay over night.

if? to capture,

therefore.

to learn ; I I I . and V.,

to teach.

HEib why ?

in order that, for the

sake of (§ 60, 7).

wormwood.

v?pb before (§60 , 8).

nph to take (§ 117, 5).

ftpb to glean, gather.

n^npb to meet (§ 62, 4).

tongue, language.

rOt^b chamber.

*7S£ very ("T'tfO ^ P very

exceedingly).

HWp hundred.

711SWQ anything (§ 68).

V.^2 whence.

D^riND two hundred.

"in^lp choice, best,

scroll.

p £ shield (§ 50, 3).

" ' T H P wilderness.

"Hp to measure.

S-TTO why ?

^TO whenever, as often as.

HJ'Hp country, province.

HE what?

nnD, rnn jp speedily.

ri lVlE kindred.

HD ft instruction, chastise

ment.

HID death (§ 49a, e.).

rWD to die (§ 124, 4).

n 3 t p altar (§ 50b, 2).

njCip camp.

nntjjqn thought.

178 VOCABULARY I.

nt£p rod, tribe.

ntjD rain.

""ittTP uprightness.

HSP wounding, wound.

"DE to sell.

s b p to be full.

TJSy£ messenger, angel.

r D s S p work (§ 53, 3).

ttfaa1?^ garment.

Tf 7» king.

TfyE to reign,

queen.

nsi3V» kingdom (§ 53, 2).

D^riifpp tongs.

nr ibpp kingdom.

ilyttJSpE dominion.

IP from (§ 25).

n n ? p meal-offering, gift.

Tlttnp Manasseh.

"iSpE prison.

Dpp to melt.

"iQpp number.

upwards.

V??£ deed.

ntT'S^ work.

nfrs? tithe. S^tt to find.

rQgfc pillar.

iTlÊ commandment.

n B ? ? Mizpah.

D n ? 9 Egypt.

EHpE? sanctuary.

nipp place (/?/. niDhps). SnD Mara (i.e., bitter).

n^~)p appearance.

"HE to rebel.

"1*1^ to be bitter.

nttto Moses.

n^tpD anointed one (§ 50b, 2).

n^3tt?e image (§ 53. 2).

n~p^f t reward, hire (§ 52).

bttJB parable, proverb.

lEtTO, n n ^ t p p charge (§ 52).

n ^ D staff.

nnQIpfc family (§ 52).

toQ^JD judgment.

n p p p butler.

ttfffite) to feel.

n ? dead man.

p i n p sweet.

D\np few men.

NJ I beseech thee.

CS? saith ; lit., noun, the

utterance of.

7pg3 faithful.

W?3 to prophesy (§ 132, 1).

^3? V., to look.

H*0? prophet.

^M opposite (§ 6 •).

T3? V., to tell. ,

*TS?5 prince, leader.

n | 3 frequently goring.

M to touch (§ 131, 2).

VOCABULARY I. 179

^35 to plague.

»3J to draw near (§ 116).

^ 1 5 noble.

^73 to vow.

*n*J3 vow.

-inj river (pi. n i i n ? ) .

HI 3 dwelling,

n m to lead.

inheritance. r ^

DTO III . , to comfort (§ 111,

t^n? HI . , to divine.

ritttfl? copper.

Htpa to incline (§ 133, 1).

ttftOJ to leave behind, neglect.

n y r ? Nineveh.

H?3 V., to smite (§ 132,2).

T[p3 drink-offering.

^D2 to journey.

E*1?? pleasant.

C^2 pleasantness.

^P^3 Naomi.

~l^5 young man.

rHp3 maiden.

n22 to blow.

b s j to fall (§ 117, 3).

HSvp5 wonder.

ttfM soul.

bS3 Y., to deliver.

n,"J3 to be innocent (§ 133,4).

^P3 innocent.

^3 light (pi. ni-13).

.Ntp? to bear (§ 132,2).

N

2OT to blow.

N EJJ prince.

""^3 eagle.

in? to give (§ 117,4).

2 3 ? to surround (§ 118).

^ n p around (§ 59).

TJ D to anoint.

D ID horse.

"^D to depart, turn.

l i m p Sihon.

H2D tabernacle.

n b p Selah!

nbp to forgive.

to raise a mour»d.

jlbD fine flour.

TJ^D to support.

B'HJ?? blindness.

1£p to mourn.

n?^pp ship.

"l?P I. to count ; I I I . to

relate.

-)Sp book.

b|?p to stone.

n n p to hide, V.

~>rip secret.

"O^ to serve.

1 3 ^ servant.

*"Q? to pass over.

»"H33? indignation.

n|3J cake.

180 VOCABULARY I.

~rp until OH£ IV exceed

ingly).

*T$ witness.

H"TV congregation.

n^HP testimony, law.

TO yet, still (§ 57, 4).

V)2 yoke.

iniquity.

DVTO eternity (§ 49c, A),

"py iniquity.

7i?i^ enchanter.

W2V9 punishment.

W to fly.

^V bird.

TO skin.

Tp goat (§ 49J, B).

^ ty to forsake.

TO to help.

W eye (§ 54, 4).

^ ( / ) city (§ 50», 7)

rhv to go up. burnt-offering.

nVb? deed. \?1? to rejoice.

Ep with.

DP people (§ 49d, A, and

§ 17a, e).

TOp to stand.

T«3? pillar.

P*?»S Amalek.

"Ofep Ammonite.

*£P valley.

riES opposite (§ 60, 10).

Hjy to answer ; I I I . , to

afflict (§ 128,3).

\2¥ cloud.

"IS? dust.

VP tree, stick (§ 50a, 6).

n^3§5 idols.

Tl'SV counsel.

D ^ y strong (strong man).

Q?P bone (/.) (pi. n t o ? S ;

COM**. n t o ? y ) .

j?.P because.

?p_P to arrange, to set in

battle array.

nbV to make (§ 128, 3).

7inbV: ten.

^n'WV tenth-part (§ 68).

\ntttp (§ 64a).

nv time (§ 49a, B).

n.FI37 now.

V-ip suitable.

H5 here.

HQ mouth (§ 55).

YÊ to scatter.

ir\B to fear.

b b s VII . , to pray.

^ b ? Philistine.

IB lest (§ 61, 4).

n25 to turn (§ 128, 3).

E*OQ face (tfAe singular form

does not exist, § 60, 8).

VOCABULARY I. 181

nos nps

^9? \>VB

UVB

DVB - T

TB9

n^P? TpQ

13 n l ? nns n | n?

D-15 T T

rrins -ns

ansa - T ^ ^ Q

c'sns nns

njriQ

n t i s

sng

- ]HS

to pass over.

paschal offering,

Passover.

graven-image.

to work, to do.

time, Q???S9 twice two times).

to move.

to visit, to num

the

(=

ber ;

I I . , to be missing ; V., to appoint.

numberings.

officer.

(15)71, § 17a, e) bullock.

eowr.

to be fruitful

fruit. rigour.

Persia.

Pharaoh.

V., to frustrate,

annul.

to spread out.

transgression.

suddenly.

to be deceived ; V

enlarge.

to

, to

to open; I I I . , to unloose.

door.

suddenly.

sheep.

>?¥ glory.

I S ( ^ ? ) side.

p-JS righteousness.

p l S to be righteous. npl!£ righteousness.

p^lS righteous (man).

HJS I I I . , to command.

J'V? Zion.

to prosper.

JlftS to grow, spring forth.

)*££ north.

]5? to hide.

r nbV Zipporah,

3b,7? Ziklag.

n n S trouble.

V^p I . and III . , to gather.

I^rj to bury.

-157. grave (§ 50).

l i p to bend (the head), to

bow.

ttfllp holy (holy man, saint). D ip east.

Dip to come before. rPTHp blackness.

EHp to be holy.

E?7P holiness, sanctuary

(§ 49a, D.) slayer.

Vlp voice (pi. n'lbip).

K p to arise (§ 123). ^ p to slay.

182 VOCABULARY.

)bi7 (/. naai7) small. -1^1?

vn ^P

n?p n ?n T n?P v:.

I I I . , V., to offer incense.

Cain.

wall (pi. ni-r^p). height.

to buy.

reed. end.

* ] ^ to be angry.

n s p end (§ 53, 3).

N^rj_to call.

=npT

^m ^?T

*I^PT nt?r?.

run T T

aW-i

to be near.

midst (§ 62, 2).

V., to attend, hearken.

to bind.

bow (§ 53, 3).

to see.

head (§ 50a, 8).

littfK-l first (§ 66).

m rri

n ? ? l "?T

^ T I

o^nsn Vv *m rrn on ?n V-n

(/. n;p_) great. greatness, multitude.

ten thousand.

to increase (§ 128, 5).

fourth.

twenty thousand.

(/.) foot (§ 54, 3). to pursue.

(/.)wind,spirit(§50b,2)

to be high.

to be evil

to run.

s m

^rn am

D^m

width.

Rachel.

to have mercy.

mercy.

VCH to wash.

Pn Ml M i

T "

c i fepi

i n ?'"">

vanity.

to ride.

Rechab.

high.

creeping-thing.

( / . n ^ n ) evil, bad.

evil, wickedness.

^V") famine. nV7

- T

Nyi

nsn P7

vw~l TOBh.

b^stp ¥ I H #

bsitj? rmjgtf;

^ 2 $ nbiatf

25a? nv^w

evil.

to be evil.

to heal.

to murder.

empty.

wicked.

wickedness.

Saul.

Sheoi (abode of the

dead).

to ask.

remnant.

tribe, rod.

ear of corn (pi. ub^)

shibboleth.

II . , to swear (§ 94, 2, 3).

seven. ^ZW to break.

VOCABULARY I. 183

r n t P to rest, to cease ( foot

note to p. 90).

nZW Sabbath.

^W Almighty.

I2W to return (ivhen joined

to another ve?b, see

§ 122, 7).

&9ittf judge,

"litt? ox (§ 50a, 9).

Jttfatf Shushan.

HPTE? to bow down (§ 128, 7).

toHtp to slay, slaughter.

~inK7 morning.

nnttf V., to destroy.

U>&W Shittim (acacia).

nâJ, rrr<g7 song. I23t£? to lie down.

rDtp to forget,

D ^ Shechem.

WDW V., to rise up early.

ptt? to dwell.

fpttf neighbour.

Eibtt? peace.

rf?tt? to send ; I I I . , to Let go.

Tjbtt? Y., to cast.

y ? $ spoil.

u?W to be at peace, to be

perfect ; HI . , to pay.

perfect.

nfebtp Solomon.

F^ttf to draw (a sword).

nwbtp three.

Ditt?1??? (usuallyjoined to^ft^)

heretofore (/^., the

third day).

DB? name (§ 50a, 10).

D ^ there.

Itttp V., to destroy.

HEttf thither,

oarnue'.

H ^ f t p tidings, report.

n^W heaven (§ 50b, 3).

Qtttt? to be desolate.

Tlpp eight.

VT^W to hear.

^Kp to keep.

aJfittJ sun.

W tooth.

HJtt? year (§ 52).

njfitf sleep (§ 51c, C).

ta?3?? two.

n^B? VII . , to be dismayed.

^ II . , to lean.

- W gate.

tSDtt? to judge.

TJSIJ7 to pour out.

nija; v. o/nnttf (§ 128,6). bft# shekel.

^1?$ falsehood.

^5"]?? sceptre.

"HtP to be an enemy.

r n t P to minister, to serve.

Httttp six.

nntj? to drink (§ 128, 6).

184 VOCABULARY I.

D)m two (/.) (§ 64a.)

SOttf plenty.

yzip to be full, to be satiated,

rrjtp field (§ 49b, D).

D ttf to place.

TOE? to rejoice.

nb^ tp raiment.

T?{p Seir.

n^Vip he-goat.

nStt? lip (§ 54, 7).

ptP sackcloth.

nb prince (§ 50a, 11).

TTlty Sarah. ?ntp seraph.

*DP to burn.

nD~]tp burning.

rTODJp understanding.

n"jin thanksgiving,

t j in ( t j in co?*^.) midst

(§ 60, 5). nyîn worm.

"1W to search out.

rnin law. n n r i under, instead of (§ 59,

ttrhrn wine. &*!& he-goat.

HyPl to hang.

7>iftJ?l yesterday (usually

joined to OtPytt?, which

see).

"T ft-FI continually.

D ft-FI perfect, without ble

mish.

Tf^ri to lay, to support.

EPfJl to end.

nM^p cause of estrangement.

n ^ = ? n glory.

/ lyD^ prayer.

^ S n to lay hold of.

nnnj - l offering.

nV-T")^ shouting, sounding the

cornet.

nVUpn nine.

VOCABULARY II.

ENGLISH INTO H E B R E W . *

Aaron, *PL}&

Abishag, 3 ^ 3 8 able, t o b e , b b j (§ 122, 6).

abomination, rQ3?\n

about (with numerals) (§ 65, 10). Abraham, E r n 3 S

according to, ? (§ 24).

acknowledge, to, r\l) (§ 135, 1).

Adonijah, ri^ltt

after, n n « , ^ . q S ( § 59,5) .

afterwards, TOnrjsa

age, old, Q^pT

age (§ 65, 8).

all, bb (§ 68, 2).

also, 03

altar, TOTS (§ 50b, 3).

Amorite, "HE$

and, 1 (§ 31).

anger, *]*?, fVltf

anger, to provoke to, 0?5» V.

answer, to, H3V

any more, T137

arise, to, O^p army, v^P

around, ^ 3 ? (§ 59 ,6) .

arrow, VD (§ 49J, H).

as, ? ( § 24), ^ 2

Asa, ND«

ashamed, to be, 8^22 (§ 124, 6).

ask, to, bsttf

ass, n t a q

astonished, to be, EP*? attend, to, ^ p , Y. avenger, 'fc$2

Baal, b ? 3

Babylon, b ^ 2

bag, ^ 5 (§ 55).

Balaam, Dyb?

Balak, pb? band, rrcnD, b3? basin. HO

* The Pronouns and Numerals are omitted from this Vocabulary. A Roman number (as III., V.) refers to the conjugation to be used. Thus •" DJJ3 V. indicates that the Hiphil, not the Kal, is to be used to mean to provoke to anger.

IcSfi VOCABULARY II.

battle, rron1?*? bear, to, «fc?

bear (children), to, \7\

because, ?V-

before {adv. of time), £H$ (§ 89b)

before (adv. of place), N5.5?

(§ 60, 8). behold, nan (§ 57, 3). behold, to, EDJ, V.

Benjamin, "pp^St

best, better (see § 34).

Bethel, b s - n ^

between, T 5 (§ 58, 1).

big, Vh? bind, to, itfiJ bless, to, ^ , I I I .

blessing, nDH?

blood, CH (§ 50a, 2).

body, dead, vbn

book, H^p (§ 49a, B).

bottle, b^3 bow, n#j? (§ 53, 3). bow, to, 1*TfJ

bow down, to, nnitf (§ 128, 7).

bread,

breadth, arn, tern break, to, ""OH?

break in pieces, to, "O^p, I I I .

breath, npttfc

bridle, nion^ bring, to, NiSl, V. (§ 136, 1). bring low, to, b?U7, Y.

bring near, to, mpT, V., ^ V.

bunch, n73« burn, to, *nj®

burn incense, to, ^^pr, V. burnt-offering, ny3) bury, to, "Oft but, TJW ; = and (§ 31). butler, nfttTO

by (by means of), 5 ; (at side

of), ^

Cake, nar call, to, bnj?

camel, ^9? (§ 50b, 3).

camp, njriE}

can (to be able),bbj (§ 122, 6).

candlestick, rT}375

cast, to, Tyb^, Y.

cattle, n^n^ l (§ 53, 3).

certainly, use Inf. Abs. (§ 92, B).

chastisement, HDÊ

child, 1^ .

cease, to, HZW (see footnote to

p. 90).

certainly, see surely,

chief, ^W

city, ^ (f.) (§ 50a, 7).

clap, to, P50

close, to, "iSy

cloud, ft? come, to, W^ (§ 136, 1).

comfort, to, DTO (§ 111, 2).

VOCABULARY II. 187

command, to, i"^?, I I I .

commandment, ^1?P

companion, 15??

company,

conceal, to, Qb^, HD3, I I I .

confess, to, H T , VI I . (§ 135, 1).

congregation, <"H > '"î?

consecrate, to, D^TT^bp, I I I .

consume, to, b ? S ( § § 120, 120b).

continue, to, îQ) (§ 122,7).

counsel, n^J5

court, ~ ^ n

covenant, fVlSl

create, to, fcOS

creator, N*Tl2l

creditor, Hgfa

cry, to, PS?

cubit, n^W

curse, to,

cut off, to, r n ^ (see footnote to

p. 90).

Dan, H

daughter, H 5 (§ 55).

daughter-in-law, H^S

David, TT=T

day, CV (§ 50a, 6).

day, to-, OVn

dead, dead man, n t t

dear, i"pT

declare, to, H9p, I I I .

deed, Tlipyp

Delilah, nVb^ deliver, to, b?J , V.

depart, to, ^ O

desolate, to be, Q£E7

destroy, to, ! £ & V. ; nn\$ V. die, to, r&& (§ 124, 4). dip, to, bnts

dirge, H^p

distant, p^rTT

divide, to, V}?, V . ; p b n

do, to, HTO (§ 128, 3).

do well, to, n^T , V. (§ 121).

door-post, HptJp down, to go, T]^ draw near, to, t^33, ^Pp

dream,

dream, to,

drink, to, n n ^ ( § 128,6).

drink, strong, ^ 5 ^

drive, to, tth?, H I .

dust, nay dwell, to, p t ? , ^ T

Each (see § 55a, 1, and § 65, 10).

eagle, *"it£3.

ear 1!« (/•) (§ 54, 5).

ear-rings, DJ3.

early, to rise up, Eptp, V.

earth, H 9 ( / • ) (§ '17a , c).

eat, to,bDW(§ 120, 120b).

Egypt, DT1?9 .

elder, 7jft (§ 49b, C).

1 J 88

1 eldest, Vnjl (Vn? follow

1 o/* comparison, as

1 28, C, 5). 1 Elijah, ^ b s

1 emit smoke, to, )WV I enemy, n>W (§ 49c, B).

1 enrich, to, n # y V.

1 entreat, to, 573? 1 Ephraim, E?n?#

1 Esau, * J

1 escape, to,

1 evening, ^11?

1 ever, for.

1 every, Vs (§ 68 ,2 ; .

"vmn "1 11 VOCABULARY 11. *|

ed % D

m Ex,

1 everyone who, v3 (folloived by

1 ^ c participle ivith

1 fixed). / n pre-

1 evil, 3n (q/Uer nttfy W5e S^PT,

1 particularly when

I is meant).

1 except, Dtf""*?

1 executioner, Hllto

1 exile, to, nba, y .

• expect, to, Vbs, in. I expectation, rnp-Fl

1 eye, ]V? f/.) (§54, 4).

idolatry

• Face, 0^3? (rco singular form

1 omte (§ 60, 8).

1 faithful, 19g0

1 fall, to, b95

I falsehood, TJttf

family, n T O ^ p (§52 ) . 1

famine, 2VH 1 father, SH (§ 55). 1 fear, HN^

fear, to, N ^ (§ 132, 2, 3). 1 festival, an, IV'^72 j

fetch, to, npb 1

few, topp I

few in number, ^ ? 0 ? ÔP 1 field, rtl tp 1

fierceness, lV">n I

fig, n j s ^ 1

fight, to, n n S , I L ( § 94 ,2) . 1 fill, to, s b p , i n . 1

find, to, N?p J

fire, m ( / . ) . fish, ^T 1

flee, to, D?)3 1

flesh, ^ ? flint, ti?>Qbn J flood, b ^ p I

flourish, to, n£!S, m ? 1

folly, nb-js I food, b?S I

fool, V p ? I

foot, bpv ( / . ) (§ 54, 3). 1

for, / prep., ^? conj. 1

ford, nnn^p (/?z. r r m v p ) 1 forehead, H^ft 1

forget, to, rpttf 1

forsake, to, 2?^ 1

fourth part, r p ^ y ? 1

VOCABULARY II. 189

friend, Tt t , nyn

from, IP (§ 25).

fruit, ^ §

fruitful, to be, mTB

frustrate, to, "H? V.

fulfil, to, «!?», I I I . (§ 126, 1).

full, to the, VZUh

Garment, 11$ (§ 50, 1), ^ n b gate, nOQ, "158? gather, to, top*?, ^DpT, 0 7 ^ , I I I . Gaza, n-J?

girl, rn53, nb1?? give, to, 10? (§ 117,4).

give thanks, to, H T (§ 135, 1).

glad, to be, n»fr , few

gladness, n n p t p

glory, T D 3

go, to, tf?'7(§ 122,3). go down, to, T}J

go, to let, rbw in . go out, to, « ? J ( § 133, t).

go up, to, nb?7(§ 131).

God, ovrb$,b« gold, nnt good (good man), nitfi

good, to be, n&J (§ 121).

good, to do, 2&) V.

grace, ID

gracious, I ^ D

grave, "Oft (§ 50> *•)• great (great man), V n a

great, to be,

great, to make, v l ^ H I . or V.

greatness,

ground, n p i B (§ 52, II .) , V"3«

Hagar, l^*? half, ^ n (§ 68).

hand, T ( / . ) ( § 51,1 , and § 50a,

4). Hannah, Han head, ttWl (m.) (§ 50a, 8). hear, hearken, to, ^££7 heart, sb , nnb (w.) heavens, DÊttf (§ 50b, 3). heavy, *T33 Hebrew, n r i y Hebron, p ? r j height, HDp

help, to, nty, EHP, v. here, H3

heretofore, Dfefjtt; bitttf

hide, to, nrip, oby high place, HJD l

hire, ^

hire, to, "15&>

hiss, to, p'Htt? hold, to, TD«

holiness, EH-P holy (holy man), E^np hope, HJpri

horse, D^D host, « ? ? (pi. nibCl?).

190 VOCABULARY II.

house, iT2l (§ 55).

how, HE

husband, b ^ 5

hyssop, 'iTfc?

Idol, b>b$, a s ?

if, DW

in, 3 (§ 24).

incense, to burn, *")&[? I I I .

increase, rP2n.Fl

indignation, P^H

inherit, to, tthj

inheritance,

iniquity, P ^

instrument, ^2> (§ 55).

interest, Tftt?3

interpret, to, "l^Q

iron,

Isaac, PH^.

Ishmaelite, Israel, V n t p .

Jacob, np3£

Jehu, NJin?.

Jericho, sirrn>

Jeroboam, Oy^Tp.

Jerusalem,

Jordan, 1?"!'!

Joseph, HPV

Joshua, VW^

3°y3 nnptp

judge, to, T2DE7, 1 ^

judge, tS9htt?

Keep, to, n£«*

kill, to, nn, rvt&, v., btsp, kindness, *"Jpn

kindled, to be, r n n (§ 128, 3).

kindred, fTTÊ

king, Tj!?9

kingdom,

kiss, to, P^J

know, to, STJ (§ 131).

knowledge, ny^T

Lack, to, ^ p n (§ 109, 4).

lad, n^3. (§ 49, C)

Lamech, Tfftb

land, n<? ( A

law, nn'in lay hold, to, THS

lead, to, an; (§ 117,6); tybn, v. learn, to,

leave, to, n*y, tt?©3

left, to be, n»tt7, I I .

lest, 15

let go, to, nbttf, I I I .

letter, 3 $ ? » , r n | M (.§ 5Id).

Levite, ^

lie down, to, ZL3W

life, D^n

lift up, to, en, y . ; sba light, TIM (p/. Dn'lM or /THIN).

rP2n.Fl

VOCABULARY II. 11)1

like, 3 (§ 24).

lintel, *lip«*?

lip, ns tp (§ 54, 7).

little, a, &V9

little ones, *lr£

live, to, r\>n (§ 130).

lodge, to, f v

loose, to, 3H5

Lord, the, 'n (== nirp) lord, i n s , p . p (of the Philis

tines).

lot, Vria Lot, toib loud, b i i | love, to, ^ n s

loving-kindness, ^ ? D

low, to be

low, to bring,

Maiden, HDbp, nb^rm

maid-servant, HEN (§ 53, 3).

make, to, nttfE

make, to (a covenant), ri.13

male, "ipt

man, tt^M (§ 55).

man servant, *T5^

mantle, n ^ N , r t o b

many, m. (/. n ? n , ;>/. C^51)

marvellous works, niN>?a (ii. -Participle of wba).

meet, to, ^2?

meet, to ( = towards), nNHpb

(§ 62, J) , melt, to, DDE mention, to, ~1?t , V. Merab, m a mercj, DÊprn messenger, Micah, H p ^ Midian, rT7? midst, Tfin (§ 60, 5) ; ^ ( 7

C§ 62, 2). might, rnsojt, nb mighty (mighty man), 1225 minister, to, f"nttf, I I I .

month, t^^rr morning, *1jJ3

Moses, H^ft

Most High, l i ^ 7

mother, DM, ^ « (^/ . nfetf).

mountain, "in (§ 50a, 3).

mourning, mouth, Hg (p. 55).

multiply, to, Tiyi (§ 128, 5). murderer, n!£Y")

Nabal, b?5

name, DB? (§ 50a, 10).

nation, ^3 (p/. D?i2).

nay, frO

Nebat, tt?3 neighbour, ] ? ^ new, trnn

192 VOCABULARY II.

night, nbf?

Nisan, 1^3 no, not, -bN, s b , ^ « ( § 61, B).

noble, ^ 1 3

north, ^ 3 ?

nothing, r « (§ 61, B).

now, nrip now ( = I pray thee), WD

number, ~)?PP

numbering, E^TlpG

Oath, n y ^ « 7

observe, to, '"lfttP

office, m ^ p (§ 52).

officer, TpQ

oil, )W old, 1PT

old age, nyfi? (Ex. 21, C, 5).

only, P I

open, to, nriQ

other, ^CI«

other, one to the, ^ n i r r b a t^tf

overthrow, to, tJDn (§ 109, 5).

ox, i W (§ 50a, 9).

Palace, ito^H (pz. n i a ^ ) , byn

palm (tree), ^9*?; (of hand)

n? (§ 54, 6). pass, to, ~0¥ path, m'M (p/. nimw; C o^.

nirns), nyris

pay to, DbtJ7, I I I .

peace, people, D? (§ 49d, A).

perish, to, "QH (§ 120, B). Pharaoh, H^nQ

Philistine, *vnpb§5 physician, N$V")

pieces, to break in, *Otp, I I I . pit, n i s (§ 42).

place, D'lpB (§ 42).

place, high, nft!2

plain, "13?

plant, to, ^toj

play, to, pntJ7, I I I .

pleasing, to ba, 2&T (§ 121).

plenty, S;tto

plunder, to, tt?

poor, to be, EH J

pot, T D

pour out, to, TfD ?

power, H3

praise, to, ^ b n ? I I I .

praises, to sing, ÊT, I I I .

pray, to, bb>Q, V I I .

pray thee (you), I, NJ

prater, nb?F1

precious, *">i

presence, se£ face. priest, i n b , pZ. D^rj3

prince, nfe (§ 50a, 11).

profane, to, bbn, in.

prophet, K*05

VOCABULARY II. 193

proverb, 'V?^ provoke to anger, to, D 2 3 , V. pure, -lintp

pursue, to, *1TJ put forth, to, nbtt?

Quake, to, 1^3 queen, nf?v (§ 51).

Rachel, b m rain, to, ~^D

rain, ^ 9 , Dttfc '

raise on high, to, E^D, I I I .

Rebecca, î??*!

rebuke, to, n ? J , V.

rebuke, nnriin recognise, to, n*P (§ 135, 1),

•>??, v . redeem, to, ^ S |

redeemer,

redemption, ^Y^5

rejoice, to, HEtt?, WW.

relate, to, "I9P, I I I . ; ^5?, V.

remember, to, " D |

remove, to, ~^D? V.

reproach, *"J?"]0

reprove, to, HD;, V.

rest, to, nntt;, rra (§ 131). return, to, 2 W

revered, N"pD (Niphal Participle

of vni). ride, to, ^5*1

righteous, P^T^

righteousness, î77? rise, to, Q^p

rise up early, to, Epttf, V.

robe, ttJ-m1?, ^33, nbptp

rod, tflgl, H ^ p

roll away, to, T?J

Ruth, n n

Sabbath, natt?

sacrifice, n?T

sacrifice, to, rQ*

saddle, to, ^ ? n

sake of, for the, JSB1? (§ 60, 7)#

salvation, H ^ ^

Samaria, )^W

Samson, p a ^ t f

sanctify, to, EHR, I I I . or V.

sanctuary, ttn|?D

Saul, ^Mtf

save, to, rttf;, V.

say, to, ^ ( § 120).

scales, D^T^ft

scatter, to, V ^ , V.

scroll,

sea, DJ

see, to, TllpT (§ 134).

seed, 3nt

seek, to, ttfaa , I I I .

Seir, ^W

seize, to, THS (§ 120), folloioed

by 22 in front of the objective.

194 VOCABULARY II.

sell, to, ^?£ send, to, nbtt?

send forth, to (a hand),

(a person, tire), nbtp, I I I .

separate, to,

servant, 122

serve, to, * P ^

service, '"H-*-^

set, to, D *

shadow, bjf, ^ S

shame, ngfca (§ 52).

shame, to put to, ttn2 (§ 124,6).

she-ass, ^ ™ , />/. n ^ i n w

shed, to, TTSa; sheep, 1 ^

shekel, b p p

shepherd. HJH

Shibboleth, nbatt?

shore, HEtt?

show, to, n*n, v. (§ 134). Sibboieth, nbap silent, to be, Oft^

silver, HO?

sin, to, N^H

sin, ns^n sing, to, "l^tp

sing praises, to, *TOt ? I I I .

sink, to, SOft

slave, T^? slay, to, ^ . H , bttpT, r m , V.

sling, to, EbjJ, H I .

small, ] b p , ( / . ) n?tp[7

smite, to, r D 3 , V. (§ 133,

2). smoke, J??? snow, son, ]5 (§ 55).

soog, - w , rrya? sorrow, r n ^

soul, ttJsa (/.), jo/. nwzi sow, to, 3Ht

speak, to, " n ^ , I I I .

speedily, *"Hnp

spirit, 0-11 ( / ) (§ 50b, 2).

spoil, bbttJ

spy out, to b?n, i n . stand, to, "T£^

standing-image, H^??^

statue, ph (§ 49d, C).

stead, n n n (§ 59', 9).

steal, to, ^5?

stick, V? (§ 50a, b).

stone, to, bpD n?n stone, W? (/.),/>/. E^?S :

store, Pî??

strange, "it

stranger, ^15?, ~>t

stretch forth, to, nbttf

stroke, HStt

strong, p t n

strong drink, *">5^ stumble, to, btt?3, I I .

suckle, to, P3?,.V..(§ 121).

support, to, T[ftD

VOCABULARY II. 195

surely, ]5M (or, infinitive Absol.,

followed by finite Verb;

§ 92, B). surround, to, ^ 5 § swear, to, V2$, I I . (§ 94, 2). swift, bp,/. nbp sword, ^n.o,y. Syria, Dntf:

Tablet, rnb,;?/., nirab tail, n?r

take, to, npb (§ 117, 5).

tall, t n

. teach, to, ^ b , H I . and V., rTV;,

V. (§ 135, 2).

teaching, PH1PI

tell, to, 13?, V . ; ^2D, I I L

thanks, to give, HT , (§ 135, 1).

theft, nns?

then, TS (§ 89b).

thence, Eti?E

there, EE7

there is, &. (§ 57, 2).

thereof = his or her.

therefore, 7^7

thing, " n i (anything, rTON£).

think, to, ^ H

thought, nnirnn throne, ND3

throw, to, Tjb^, V.

time, tVS ; (wi/A numbers) El?5,

to and fro, to walk (see walk),

to-day, DVH

tongue, p ^ b (/.).

touch, to, ^3? (§ 131).

towards, (a/so expressed by n

Local), (§ 56, B).

tread, to, •Tf*l':T

tree, V? (§ 50a, 6).

tribe, &?(P

trouble, PHE

trust, to, ntS2

truth, n p ^

turn, to, "ttD

Unto, -by (§ 59, 4).

upon, - b ^ (§ 59, 8).

upright, "Itt^

upwards, n b ^ E

Valiant ( = for a son of valoui),

b>n 73b vengeance, ^?i7*3

venison, *T??

very, IMX?

vessel,

vine, 15 |

vineyard, E^.3

voice, bip, ^/. nibip vow, to, "H?

vow, "H3

196 VOCABULARY II.

Walk to and fro, to (§ 122, 3).

wall, Htt in

water, D"!5 (§ 55).

wave,

way, TH weep, to, H ? ? ( § 128,3).

weigh, to, ^ P $

welfare, &hw

well, to do, ^ , V. (§ 121).

when, ~1$^5; or, 21 or 2 with

verb in Inf. Const. (§ 92, B)

whence, D # S ^ (§ 26). where ? H?.W where, Up ~>#8 (§ 26).

whom (see § 26). why, n ^ b ^ ^ D

wicked, St th

widow, n j t ty^ wife, nt^W (§ 55).

wilderness, ^?*1P window, libn, n a n a wine, T)l wing, fl33 (§ 54, 2).

wisdom, Httpn

wise, to be, D ? n ( § l 0 9 , 4 ) .

wise (wise man), E^1? with, D? (§• 58, 2), -HM (§ 57,

1, C). withhold, to, S3» without, *?* ; V=in (p. 163, 4).

witness, ^V. woman, n $ S (§ 55).

word, ^ ^ I work, ntp??n works, marvellous {see marvel

lous).

worker, ^ B

worship, to, n W VI I . (§ 128,

7). would that! 1 8 V S (Foofewte *>

§ 117, 4).

wrath, nnn write, to, 2 0 ?

Year, n?t», (§ 52).

Zarephath, HS"!?

Zion, li»?

WEHTHEIMER, LEA AND CO., PRINTERS, CLIFTON HOUSE, WORSHIP STREET, E.C.

Documents

Adler Hebrew001st